JP7301796B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

For example, Patent Literature 1 discloses a gaming machine capable of executing a stationary period suggestion effect that is executed according to a period during which no setting change operation is performed together with a round effect in a first round game in a jackpot game. ing.

JP 2020-31839 (paragraph 0147)

As for the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1, the gaming machine capable of executing a special suggesting effect (stationary period suggesting effect) suggesting that the numerical information stored in the storage means has not been initialized, There is room for improvement because the situation in which the special suggestion production is executed is not taken into consideration.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation. The purpose is to appropriately execute a special suggestive effect in consideration of the situation.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that executes variable display (variable display) and is controllable to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player,
A state control means (CPU 103) that can be controlled to a special state (time saving state A, time saving state B (relief time saving state)) in which variable display is more likely to be performed than in a normal state;
Updating means (part for performing step 113IWS71 in game control microcomputer 100) capable of updating numerical information (relief time reduction number counter) when variable display is executed;
Storage means (RAM 102 for storing the value of the relief time reduction number counter) capable of storing the numerical information when the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped;
Initialization means (RAM) capable of initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means when power supply to the game machine is stopped and power supply to the game machine is restarted clear processing) and
With production execution means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production,
In the state control means, the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (900 times) as the number of executions of variable display, so that the special condition (the value of the relief time reduction counter is " 0 ”, that is, when the special state (time saving state B) is established,
The effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) stops the power supply to the game machine, and the power supply to the game machine stops without initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means. When the restart is performed (when the RAM clearing process is not executed when the power is turned on), when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a specific number (100 times), the numerical information stored in the storage means is initialized. It is possible to execute a special suggestive effect (first special suggestive effect) that suggests that the
When the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state in which the number of variable display execution times is the specific number, the special suggestive effect is restricted (when the variable display is executed for the 100th time after the power is turned on, the display result is In the case of a "jackpot", the first special suggestion effect is not executed),
When the number of executions of the variable display is not controlled to the advantageous state in the variable display that is the specific number of times, and when a specific condition is satisfied, the special suggestive effect is restricted ,
Information about the number of times the variable display has been performed since the start of power supply to the game machine can be displayed as a special display (the special display is displayed in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5);
The special display can change to a different mode based on the execution of the special suggestive effect (the special display mode can be changed by executing the special display change effect after the first special suggestive effect is executed). changing),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the special suggestive effect in consideration of the situation in which the special suggestive effect is executed.

Another game machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that executes variable display (variable display) and is controllable to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player,
A state control means (CPU 103) that can be controlled to a special state (time saving state A, time saving state B (relief time saving state)) in which variable display is more likely to be performed than in a normal state;
Updating means (part for performing step 113IWS71 in game control microcomputer 100) capable of updating numerical information (relief time reduction number counter) when variable display is executed;
Storage means (RAM 102 for storing the value of the relief time reduction number counter) capable of storing the numerical information when the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped;
Initialization means (RAM) capable of initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means when power supply to the game machine is stopped and power supply to the game machine is restarted clear processing) and
With production execution means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production,
In the state control means, the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (900 times) as the number of executions of variable display, so that the special condition (the value of the relief time reduction counter is " 0 ”, that is, when the special state (time saving state B) is established,
The effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) stops the power supply to the game machine, and the power supply to the game machine stops without initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means. When restarted (when RAM clear processing is not executed when power is turned on), when the number of executions of variable display after restart reaches a specific number (100 times), the numerical value stored in the storage means It is possible to execute a special suggestive effect (first special suggestive effect) that suggests that the information has not been initialized,
It is possible to execute the special suggestion effect at a different rate according to the number of times of variable display after the number of times of execution of variable display after the restart reaches the specific number (relief time reduction in the 100th variable display after power-on) The execution ratio of the first special suggestion effect differs according to the value of the number counter)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to predict the number of times of variable display until the number of times of special suggestion is reached according to the execution frequency of the special suggestion presentation, thereby improving the interest of the special suggestion presentation.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing each random number, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table, and (D) is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table. It is a figure which illustrates a production|presentation control command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination process at the time of a fluctuation start. (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of whether or not the first special suggestive effect is executed and the effect mode determination table, and (C) is an explanation showing a specific example of the effect mode determination table for the countdown effect. It is a diagram. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a rendering mode regarding the first special suggestive rendering; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding countdown production|production and relief time reduction reach|attainment production|production. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the first special suggestive effect is not executed; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode regarding each effect when the first special suggestive effect is not executed; FIG. 11 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the first special suggestive effect is executed; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode regarding each effect when the first special suggestive effect is executed; (A) is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the first special suggestion effect is not executed when the relief time reduction is reached, and (B) is when the first special suggestion effect is executed when the relief time reduction is reached. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect of. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding each production|presentation in case the 1st special suggestive production|presentation is performed at the time of relief time reduction arrival|attainment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding each production|presentation in case the 1st special suggestive production|presentation is performed at the time of relief time reduction arrival|attainment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode regarding each effect when the play time ends; It is a modified example of the time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the first special suggestion effect is executed. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a modification of the effect mode regarding each effect when the first special suggestive effect is executed; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to an effect stage; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a rendering mode regarding a second special suggestive rendering; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of whether or not to execute a second special suggestive effect and the effect mode determination table; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding periodic light emission production|presentation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a rendering mode regarding a third special suggestive rendering; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of whether or not to execute a third special suggestion effect and a effect mode determination table; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode regarding the fourth special suggestive effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of whether or not to execute a fourth special suggestive effect and the effect mode determination table; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode regarding the fifth special suggestive effect; (A) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of execution/non-execution of the fifth special suggestion effect and the effect mode determination table, (B) and (D) are execution/non-execution of the normal dialog announcement effect and effect. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a mode determination table; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode regarding the sixth special suggestive effect; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presence/absence of execution of the sixth special suggestion effect and the effect mode determination table; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode regarding the seventh special suggestive effect; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a determination table for execution/non-execution of the seventh special suggestive effect;

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3). Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is in the ON state, the big winning gate door opens the big winning gate, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big winning gate. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstructing nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9 in some cases. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main substrate 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11 , and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29 . The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls awarded to the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls awarded to the large prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 50Aa and long pieces 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern lost pattern) other than the normal pattern winning pattern is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern lost". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running or during the period when it is controlled to the jackpot game state described later (starting winning occurs, but it is based on the starting winning If the special game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, when a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol varies depending on the type of the big hit to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a big winning symbol. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing". Incidentally, the "loss" in the pachinko game machine 1 includes a "time-saving loss" that is controlled from the next variable display to a high base state (time-saving state) without going through the jackpot game.

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is a "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of the ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special game is "lost", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" (Also referred to as non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is "lost", after the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of variable display of decorative patterns is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("no reach") that is not a big hit combination. ”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach lost”).

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, and a launch control substrate are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17 , and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an alternating current power supply such as AC 100 V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is switched to the power supply board 17 . It can be supplied to electrical parts including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 from the. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 31 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main substrate 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. For example, in the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing a relief time reduction counter, which will be described later, stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value of "900" in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for progressing the game (various flags, various timers, various counters (relief time reduction counter, etc. described later), etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and error detection code. is also included. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that designates the game state before the power cut that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that designates the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit" and the type of the big hit in the case of a "big hit" are determined by the display result. is determined (predetermined) before is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of a plurality of variation patterns using a random number value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not the display result is a "big hit". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "missing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the variable probability state, and when the end of the number of cuts is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting a round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is a "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution count, and a jackpot gaming state when the upper limit execution count is reached. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured such that the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 7 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 7 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 8, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S175 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving a performance control command designating the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4". Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving the command designating the start of the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "lost", and the production process flag is set. is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is changed to "5", which is the value corresponding to the ending production process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

[Description of Characteristic Portion 07TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 07TM will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-1 to 9-36. In this embodiment, after turning on the power to the game machine (when RAM clear processing is executed) or after the occurrence of a big hit, the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 900 times) continuously in a low probability state. If the next big hit does not occur even if it is done, it may be controlled to the time saving state B (relief time saving state) among the plurality of types of time saving state. This relief time reduction is provided in order to rescue a player who did not get a big win despite playing the game for a long period of time (for example, to suppress the amount invested in the game). , in this example, it is a game state called "play time".

In this embodiment, RAM clear processing is executed when power is turned on to the gaming machine at the timing when the variable display is executed for a specified number of times (100 times in this example) after power is turned on to the gaming machine or after the occurrence of a big hit. It is possible to execute a special suggestive effect that suggests that there is no (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "deferred").

[Random value]
FIG. 9A is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 9-1 (A), in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the variation pattern determination , the random number MR4 for judging the result of the display of the general pattern, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values within the range shown in FIG. 9A, but the present invention is not limited to this. The range of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generating program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and variable display of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns, etc. are stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 in this embodiment includes the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-1 (B1) and the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-1 (B2). In addition, the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 9-2 (C1), the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 9-2 (C2), and FIG. -2 (D1) and fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-2 (D2), normal diagram display result determination table (not shown), normal diagram fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), etc. are included.

[Display result determination table]
FIG. 9-1(B) shows a configuration example of a display result determination table in this embodiment. FIG. 9-1 (B1) shows a configuration example of the first special figure display result determination table used when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 9-1 (B2) shows a variation special figure is the second special figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 .

In this embodiment, in the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in Figure 9-1 (B1), for the case where the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, if the gaming state is a low probability state (normal state or time saving state), in the range of 0 to 65535 It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1224 are assigned to "big hit", and other numerical ranges are "off". assigned to.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (B1), when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, if the gaming state is a high probability state (variable probability state), the value in the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 2330 are assigned to "big hit", and other numerical ranges are "missing" assigned.

As shown in Figure 9-1 (B2), for the case where the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the gaming state is a low probability state (normal state or time saving state), in the range of 0 to 65535 It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1224 are assigned to "big hit", and other numerical ranges are "off". assigned to.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (B2), when the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the gaming state is a high probability state (variable probability state), the value in the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 2330 are assigned to "big hit", and other numerical ranges are "missing" assigned.

[Jackpot type determination table]
9-2 (C1) and FIG. 9-2 (C2) are explanatory diagrams showing the [first special figure] jackpot type determination table and [second special figure] jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101 is. Of these, FIG. 9-2 (C1) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) This is a table for when In addition, FIG. 9-2 (C2) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) This is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the types of jackpots are determined as 3R normal jackpot A, 3R normal jackpot B, based on a random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination. This table is referred to for determining any one of the 3R normal jackpot C, the 3R probability variable jackpot, and the 10R probability variable jackpot. Here, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be described.

(3R normal jackpot A)
In this embodiment, as the jackpot type, "3R normal jackpot A" is provided in which time-saving control is executed over a maximum of 100 variable displays after the jackpot game state ends. In addition, this "3R normal jackpot A" is also a jackpot in which the probability variable control is not executed in the variable display after the jackpot game ends. In addition, the big win game state by this "3R normal big win A" is a big win in which the big win opening is changed to an open state advantageous to the player three times (first to third rounds).

(3R normal jackpot B)
In this embodiment, as the jackpot type, "3R normal jackpot B" is provided in which time-saving control is executed over a maximum of 200 variable displays after the end of the jackpot game state. In addition, this "3R normal jackpot B" is also a jackpot in which the probability variable control is not executed in the variable display after the jackpot game ends. In addition, the big win game state by this "3R normal big win B" is a big win in which the big win opening is changed to an open state advantageous to the player three times (first to third rounds).

(3R normal jackpot C)
In this embodiment, as the jackpot type, "3R normal jackpot C" is provided in which time-saving control is executed over a maximum of 600 variable displays after the jackpot game state ends. In addition, this "3R normal jackpot C" is also a jackpot in which the probability variable control is not executed in the variable display after the jackpot game ends. In addition, the big win game state by this "3R normal big win C" is a big win in which the big win opening is changed to an open state advantageous to the player three times (first to third rounds).

(3R probability variable jackpot)
In this embodiment, as the jackpot type, there is provided a "3R probability variable jackpot" in which time-saving control is executed until the next jackpot occurs after the jackpot game state ends. In addition, this "3R variable probability big win" is also a big win in which variable probability control is executed until the next big win occurs after the end of the big win game. In addition, the big win game state by this "3R probability variable big win" is a big win in which the big win opening is changed to an open state advantageous to the player three times (first to third rounds).

(10R probability variable jackpot)
In this embodiment, as the jackpot type, a "10R probability variation jackpot" is provided in which time-saving control is executed until the next jackpot occurs after the jackpot game state is over. In addition, this "10R probability variable jackpot" is also a jackpot in which the probability variable control is executed until the next jackpot occurs after the jackpot game ends. Also, the big win game state by this "10R probability variable big win" is a big win that changes the big win opening to an open state advantageous to the player 10 times (1st to 10th rounds).

Thus, in the present embodiment, the game state in which the time-saving control is executed until the next big win occurs after the end of the big-hit game state is referred to as the time-saving state A among the plurality of types of time-saving states. .

In this embodiment, five types of 3R normal jackpot A to 3R normal jackpot C, 3R probability variable jackpot, and 10R probability variable jackpot are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, four or less jackpot types or six or more jackpot types may be provided.

As shown in Figure 9-2 (C1), [for the first special figure] in the jackpot type determination table, 0 to 89 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are "3R normal jackpot A" are assigned, 90 to 101 are assigned to "3R normal jackpot B", 102 to 104 are assigned to "3R normal jackpot C", and 105 to 284 are assigned to "3R probability variable jackpot" It is assigned, and 285 to 299 are assigned to "10R probability variable jackpot".

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-2 (C2), in the [for the second special figure] jackpot type determination table, 0 to 59 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are "3R normal jackpot A ”, 60 to 89 are assigned to “3R normal jackpot B”, 90 to 104 are assigned to “3R normal jackpot C”, and 105 to 149 are assigned to “3R probability variable jackpot ”, and 150 to 299 are assigned to “10R probability variable jackpot”.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number for judging the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is determined by special figure display result determination. It may be determined using MR1, which is a random value for .

[Variation pattern]
FIGS. 9-2 (D1) and 9-2 (D2) are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the variation pattern table in this embodiment. FIG. 9-2 (D1) shows a specific example of a variation pattern table for losing, and FIG. 9-2 (D2) shows a specific example of a variation pattern table for big wins.

<Variation pattern without reach>
In the present embodiment, the variation pattern without reach (“non-reach loss”) is a combination of ornamental patterns indicating that the change display result is “loss” without reaching reach after the start of the variable display. is a variation pattern in which is stopped and displayed.

<Variation pattern with normal reach>
In the present embodiment, the variation pattern with normal reach ("normal reach lost", "normal reach big hit") means that after the reach state is established, the final display is performed without executing the super reach effect (battle effect, etc.) described later. The result is fixed and stopped.

<Variation pattern with super reach>
In the present embodiment, among the variation patterns with super reach, in the variation patterns with super reach A ("super reach A miss", "super reach A big hit"), after the reach state is established, as a super reach A effect, A battle effect is executed to notify whether or not a big win is won by a battle between the ally character and the enemy character, and the final display result is fixed and stopped after the battle effect is finished. Here, when the final display result is "lost", an effect (defeat effect) in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed. On the other hand, when the final display result is a "big win", an effect (victory effect) is executed in which the ally character wins over the enemy character. In addition, when the final display result is a "big hit", an effect (defeat effect) of the ally character being defeated by the enemy character is executed, and then a effect of the ally character resurrecting and winning against the enemy character (revival victory effect) is performed. may be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, among the variation patterns with super reach, in the variation pattern with super reach B ("super reach B miss", "super reach B big hit"), after the reach state is established, super reach B effect Then, a super reach B effect (sometimes referred to as a challenge effect) is executed to inform whether or not a big win is won by the ally character attacking the rock once. Here, when the final display result is "lost", an effect (failure effect) in which the ally character fails the challenge is executed. On the other hand, when the final display result is a "big hit", an effect (success effect) is executed in which the ally character succeeds in the challenge. In addition, when the final display result is "big hit", the effect (failure effect) of the ally character failing the challenge is executed, and then the effect of the ally character succeeding in reviving the challenge (successful resurrection effect) is executed. may

([For loss] variation pattern judgment table)
As shown in FIG. 9-2 (D1), in the [for loss] variation pattern determination table, 1 to 900 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern of "non-reach loss" 901 to 970 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach out", 971 to 990 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "super reach A out", and 991 to 997 are assigned to "super reach B is assigned to the variation pattern of "out of line".

([For big hit] Variation pattern judgment table)
As shown in FIG. 9-2 (D2), in the [for big hit] variation pattern determination table, 1 to 50 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern of "normal reach big hit". 51 to 450 are assigned to the "super reach A big hit" variation pattern, and 451 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach B big hit" variation pattern.

As shown in Figure 9-2 (D1) and (D2), the variation pattern with super reach B among the variation patterns with super reach is the variation with super reach A among the variation patterns with super reach Expectations for big hits are higher than patterns.

[Production control command]
FIG. 9-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 9-3 is an example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-3, the command 8001H is a first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

The command 8C00H is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result specification command, for example, a decision result (predetermined result) as to whether the variable display result is a "loss" or a "jackpot", and a plurality of jackpot types when the variable display result is a "jackpot" Different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which type to use.

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command with a variable display result of "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "3R normal jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "3R normal jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "3R normal jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "3R probability variable big hit". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "10R probability variable big hit".

Command 8FXXH stops (confirms) the variable display of decorative patterns in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and starts the next variable display. It is a design determination designation command that designates a design determination period until it is done.

Among the symbol confirmation designation commands, for example, the command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation A designation command that terminates the variation of the special symbols and sets the symbol confirmation period to 0.5 seconds. The command 8F01H is a symbol determination B designation command that terminates the special symbol variation and sets the symbol determination period to 15 seconds. The command 8F02H is a symbol determination C designation command that terminates the variation of the special symbols and sets the symbol determination period to 20 seconds.

The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability / low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. On the other hand, the second game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability / high base state, time saving state) where the probability variation control is not performed, and the command 9502H is the game state where the time saving control is performed and the probability variation control is performed (high Probability / high base state, probability variable state) corresponding to the third game state designation command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command for designating the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred and the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the error (abnormality) specification command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) occurrence has been determined on the production control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing, which will be described later.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also called a "fanfare command") for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big winning game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating the display of an effect image at the end of the big win game state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data are set corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game state (for example, "1" to "10").

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first starting winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start opening winning designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to display the number of special figure reserved storage so that it can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number, in order to display the number of special figure pending storage so as to be identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command D100H is a jackpot start switch passage notification command for notifying that the game ball has passed the jackpot start switch.

Command E1XXH is a remaining time saving frequency notification command for notifying the remaining time saving control frequency in the time saving state (time saving state A) excluding relief working time saving.

The command F100H is a right-handed lamp turn-on notification command for notifying that the right-handed lamp is turned on, and the command F101H is a right-handed lamp turn-off notification command for notifying that the right-handed lamp is turned off.

The command 9000H is a power-on designation command that designates that power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started.

Command 91XXH is a restoration time reduction time number designation command, and is an effect control command that designates the value of the relief time reduction number counter at the time of power restoration. In the restoration time reduction number designation command, for example, according to each digit (1st digit, 2nd digit, 3rd digit, 4th digit) of the value (4-digit value) of the relief time reduction counter at the time of power restoration, Different EXT data are set.

The command 94XXH is a relief time reduction number designation command, and is an effect control command that designates the value of the relief time reduction number counter. In the relief time reduction number designation command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is achieved.

The command 98XXH is a recovery-time game state designation command for designating a game state at the time of power restoration in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the game state specification command at the time of restoration, for example, different EXT data is set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. As a specific example, the command 9800H is the first recovery time gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (low probability / low base state, normal state) in which neither time saving control nor probability variation control is performed, command 9801H is time saving control While it is performed, the game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability / high base state, time saving state) in which the probability change control is not performed is performed, and the command 9802H is performed while the time saving control is performed and the probability change control is performed. The game state designation command at the time of the third restoration corresponding to the game state (high probability/high base state, variable probability state).

[Game control main processing]
FIG. 9-4 is a flow chart showing the game control main process in this embodiment. In this example, the processes of steps S1 to S7, the processes of steps S8 to S9, and the processes of steps S10 to S12 are the same as those shown in FIG.

In this example, when the effect control command for instructing recovery from the power failure is transmitted in step S7, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the relief time reduction number counter for counting the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction. A hexadecimal value is set to the value of the current relief time reduction number counter, and control is performed to transmit a restoration time relief time reduction number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step S07TM13), and the process proceeds to step S10 as it is.

In addition, in this example, at the time of power failure recovery, a case is shown in which a recovery time reduction number designation command and a relief time reduction number designation command are transmitted separately from the command at the time of restoration. However, it is not limited to such a mode. . For example, in the EXT data of the recovery command (eg, power-on designation command) transmitted in step S7, a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened may be set and transmitted. .

Further, when the effect control command for instructing initialization is transmitted in step S9, the CPU 103 sets "900" to the relief time reduction number counter (step S07TM15). Therefore, in this example, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the game machine is powered on, "900" is set to the relief time reduction number counter. That is, in this example, after the RAM clearing process is executed when the power supply to the game machine is turned on, even if the variation display is executed 900 times, if the big hit does not occur, the relief time is shortened and the time saving state B is controlled. will be In addition, in this example, since the effect control command for instructing the initialization to be transmitted in step S9 and the initial value ("900") set to the relief time reduction number counter correspond, the CPU 103 performs the initialization. It is also possible to specify the initial value to be set to the relief time reduction number counter based on the transmission of the directed effect control command.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the relief time reduction counter (“900” in this example), sets the current relief time reduction counter value, and issues a restoration time relief time reduction number designation command for effect control. It controls transmission to the CPU 120 (step S07TM16).

In this example, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the game machine is powered on, the relief time reduction counter is set to "900" and initialized. Instead, the configuration may be such that the initial setting of the relief time reduction number counter is not performed when the RAM clear processing is executed. With such a configuration, the game can be started from the continuation of the value of the relief time reduction number counter of the previous day, so that the investment amount until the relief time reduction can be reduced and the player is not disadvantaged. be able to.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, only when the ON of the clear switch is detected (Y in step S3) and the RAM clearing process is executed, the initial setting of the relief time reduction counter is not performed, and the RAM When an abnormality is detected (N in steps S4 and S5) and the RAM clearing process is executed, the initial setting of the relief time reduction number counter may be performed.

[Time saving flag, variable probability flag]
In this embodiment, when one of the conditions for being controlled to a time saving state is satisfied, a time saving flag can be set. The time saving flags include a time saving flag A and a time saving flag B. In the following description, erasing (or clearing) the flag may be referred to as resetting the flag.

The time saving flag A is set when it is controlled to the time saving state A via the big hit. This time-saving flag A is set when the big hit game state of the big hit ends, and when the time-saving state A ends (timing of the big hit during the time-saving state A, specified number of times (100 times, 200 times, 300 times) is erased at the timing when the time-saving control is finished and the normal state is controlled.

The time saving flag B is set when it is controlled to the time saving state B controlled via the relief time saving. This time-saving flag B is set when 900 times of variable display is performed in which the display result does not become a big win pattern after RAM clearing, or when the 900 times of variable display in which the display result does not become a big win pattern in a low probability state after the end of the big win game state. is executed, and when the time saving state B ends (the timing of the big hit during the time saving state B, the timing when the time saving control ends 1000 times and is controlled to the normal state, etc.) .

The variable probability flag is set when the variable probability state is controlled. In this embodiment, when the big hit game of the probability variable jackpot ends, the probability variable flag is set as the game state is controlled to the probability variable state. This variable probability flag is erased at the timing when the variable probability state ends (such as the timing of a big hit during the variable probability state).

[High Base Flag at Restoration]
In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the game state designation command at the time of recovery is transmitted as the effect control command for instructing the recovery from the power interruption transmitted in step S7 of the game control main process. Based on this recovery game state designation command, if the game state at the time of power failure recovery is a high base state (low probability/high base state, high probability/high base state), the high base flag at restoration can be set. is.

In the present embodiment, when the game state designated by the game state designation command at the time of power failure recovery is the high base state, the high base flag at the time of restoration shall be set. This restoration high base flag is erased at a predetermined timing (the timing when the next big hit occurs, the timing when the relief time is reached, the timing when the power is turned off, etc.).

[Special symbol normal processing]
9-5 and 9-6 are flowcharts showing special symbol normal processing (step S110) in special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending memory number (step S07TM51). Specifically, the count value of the combined reserved storage number counter for counting the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is confirmed. If the combined reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second reserved storage number is 0 (step S07TM52). Specifically, it confirms whether or not the value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the second reserved storage number is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). is set with data indicating "second" (step S07TM53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, if only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special symbol pointer (step S07TM54).

In this embodiment, the process of steps S07TM52 to S07TM54 is performed, so that the second special symbol is displayed with priority over the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to take precedence over the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, not limited to the aspect shown in this example, for example, the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display are executed in the order in which the game ball wins the first start winning hole and the second start winning hole It may be configured as

Next, the CPU 103 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step S07TM55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random random A numerical value is read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 . In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S07TM56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and each storage area in the first reserved storage number buffer shift the contents of Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", 1 is subtracted from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and the contents of each save area in the second reserved memory number buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102. , is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 Each random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n−1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or Second reserved storage number)=1, 2, 3, 4.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S07TM57). Note that the CPU 103 saves the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 .

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for winning determination from the random number buffer area (step S07TM61), and executes the big winning determination module (step S07TM62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the hit determination random number extracted in the starting prize determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module compares a predetermined jackpot determination value with a random number for jackpot determination (see FIGS. 9-1 (B1) and (B2)), and performs a process of determining a jackpot if they match. is the program to run. That is, it is a program for executing the process of judging a big hit. In this case, if the variable probability flag indicating the variable probability state is not set (if it is in a low probability state), the CPU 103 uses the low probability jackpot determination value to perform the big hit determination. Further, if the variable probability flag is set (if the probability is high), the CPU 103 uses the high-probability big-hit determination value to perform the big-hit determination. The CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a big hit when the value of the hit determination random number matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIGS. 9-1 (B1) and (B2).

When it is determined to be a big hit (Y in step S07TM63), the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating a big hit (step S07TM64). Then, the CPU 103 determines the type (3R normal jackpot A, 3R normal jackpot B, 3R normal jackpot C, 3R probability variable jackpot, 10R probability variable jackpot) corresponding to the value of the random number for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area. ) is determined as the type of jackpot (step S07TM65). Incidentally, in this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random number extracted in the starting prize determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and determines the jackpot type.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type (step S07TM66), and advances the process to step S07TM69A. In this case, for example, when the 3R normal jackpot A is decided, the stop pattern of the special pattern is decided to be "2", and when the 3R normal jackpot B is decided, the stop pattern of the special pattern is decided. ``3'' is determined, and when the 3R normal jackpot C is decided, the stop pattern of the special pattern is decided to be ``4'', and when the 3R probability variable jackpot is decided, the stop pattern of the special pattern is decided. is determined to be "5", and if it is determined to be a 10R probability variable jackpot, the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "6", and if it is determined to be lost, the special symbol stop symbol is " -".

On the other hand, if it is not determined to be a big hit (N in step S07TM63), the CPU 103 directly advances the process to step S07TM69A.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable probability flag is set (step S07TM69A). If the variable probability flag is set (that is, if the variable probability state), the process proceeds to step S07TM84. In this example, by executing the process of step S07TM69A, when it is in the variable probability state, the process after step S07TM70 (especially the process of step S07TM71) is not performed, so when the game state is the variable probability state Even if the variable display is executed, the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not subtracted. If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if the probability is low), the process proceeds to step S07TM70.

In the present embodiment, when the variable probability flag is set, the processing after step S07TM70 is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S07TM84. If set, the process proceeds to step S07TM70, but the process of step S07TM71 may not be executed. That is, although the value of the relief time-saving number counter is not updated, a relief time-saving number designation command corresponding to the value of the relief time-saving number counter that has not been updated may be transmitted.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (Y in step S07TM70). When the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (Y in step S07TM70), the process proceeds to step S07TM84. If the value of the relief time-saving counter is 0 at this point, the timing after it has already been controlled to the time-saving state (time-saving state B) via the relief time-saving (time-saving state B or time-saving state B The timing is controlled to the normal state after 1000 fluctuations in ), and the big hit that triggers 900 to be set to the relief time reduction number counter has not occurred. Further, if the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0 (N in step S07TM70), the value of the relief time reduction number counter is subtracted by 1 (step S07TM71). Further, in this example, by executing the processing of step S07TM71, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. , the value of the relief time reduction number counter is uniformly updated.

In this example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) counts the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction on the side, and shows a case where the relief time reduction number designation command is transmitted. It is not limited to any form. For example, the production control CPU 120 side may be configured to count the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction and execute a special suggestion performance, a countdown performance, or a relief time reduction arrival performance, which will be described later.

Also, for example, when the relief time reduction counter is set (set to "900") at the timing of the relief time reduction, and the relief time reduction is configured to occur continuously, only when the relief time reduction occurs for the first time It may be configured so as to transmit the relief time-saving frequency designation command, and not to transmit the relief time-saving frequency designation command when the relief time becomes short after the second time.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time-saving number counter to the EXT data, and performs control to transmit a relief time-saving number designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S07TM73).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter after subtraction is 0 (step S07TM74). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step S07TM85. If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a relief time reduction determination flag indicating control to the time reduction state B at the end of fluctuation based on the occurrence of the relief time reduction (step S07TM75) ). Then, the process proceeds to step 113 IWS85.

Next, the CPU 103 stores the determined special symbol stop symbol in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step S07TM85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step S07TM86), and ends the process as it is.

[Special symbol stop processing]
FIGS. 9-7 and 9-8 are flowcharts showing special symbol stop processing (step S113) in special symbol process processing. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol fixing period timer (step S07TM131), and confirms whether or not the value of the symbol fixing period timer after the subtraction is 0 (step S07TM132). .

If the value of the symbol fixed period timer after the subtraction is not 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not ended yet), the special symbol stop processing is terminated. do. If the value of the symbol fixing period timer after the subtraction is 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has ended), the CPU 103 sets the big hit flag. It is checked whether or not it is set (step S07TM133). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 counts the probability variation flag, the time saving flag A, the time saving flag B, the relief time saving determination flag, and the number of execution times of the variable display during the time saving state if it is set. reset the time-saving number counter (step S07TM134).

Next, the CPU 103 sets "900" to the relief time reduction number counter (step S07TM135). Therefore, in this example, "900" is set to the relief time reduction number counter with the big hit as a trigger, and if the next big hit does not occur even if the variation display is performed 900 times after the end of the big win game, the relief time reduction is performed. Then, it will be controlled to the time saving state B.

In this example, by executing the process of step S07TM135, when a big hit is made, the initial setting is shown by setting "900" to the relief time reduction number counter at the start of the fanfare period of the big win. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, "900" may be set in the relief time reduction number counter during the round of the jackpot game, and "900" may be set in the relief time reduction number counter at the start or end of the ending period of the jackpot game to be initialized. can be configured to

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED (step S07TM136). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed notification start designation command designating the start of right-handed notification to the effect control CPU 120 (step S07TM137).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S07TM138). Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer for the time before the opening of the big winning opening (fanfare time) for measuring the time before opening the big winning opening and the second big winning opening (fanfare time). step S07TM139). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit opening pre-processing (step S114) (step S07TM140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (N of step S07TM133), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the relief time reduction determination flag is set (step S07TM170). If the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the relief time reduction determination flag (step S07TM171), resets the time reduction flag when it is set (step S07TM171A), sets the time reduction flag B, It controls to a time saving state (step S07TM171B). Then, "1000" is set in the time saving number counter (step S07TM172). Although illustration is omitted, in step 113IWS171A, if it is set, the time saving end flag is also reset. Here, when the time saving end flag is set, both the value of the time saving number counter and the value of the relief time saving number counter become 0 in one variation.

Moreover, CPU103 performs control which transmits the time saving state B specification command to CPU120 for production|presentation control (step S07TM174). After that, the process is terminated as it is.

In addition, although this example shows an example in which the relief time-saving counter is not set only by controlling the time-saving state B at the timing of the relief time-saving, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to control to the time saving state B at the timing of the relief time saving and to set the relief time saving number counter (set "900"). According to such a configuration, it is possible to continuously generate the relief time reduction, and once the relief time reduction occurs, the time reduction state can be continued until a big hit occurs.

In addition, in this example, when setting the relief time reduction counter, "900" is set, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is subtracted by 1 each time the variable display is performed, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is set to "0". ”, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when setting the relief time-saving number counter, "0" is set, and the value of the relief time-saving number counter is incremented by 1 each time the variable display is performed, and the value of the relief time-saving number counter becomes "900". It may be constructed so as to generate relief time reduction based on the fact.

In addition, in this example, by performing the process of step S07TM172, the number of fluctuations until relief time reduction occurs (900 times) 1000 times greater than the value is set as the number of times of time reduction, but that It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in step S07TM172, the same value as "900" may be set in the time saving number counter, or a smaller value may be set.

Further, in step S07TM172, a value corresponding to a plurality of types of times of shortening of working hours may be configured to be able to be set in the number of times of shortening of working hours counter. For example, when the first relief time is reduced, the time reduction counter is set to "100", and when the second relief time is reduced, the time reduction counter is set to "1000". good too.

Also, for example, it is configured to determine the number of times of time saving by performing a lottery process based on random numbers, and in step S07TM172, a value corresponding to the number of times of time saving determined by the lottery process may be set in the time saving number counter. good. In this case, for example, the number of times of time saving may be determined to be 100 times with a probability of 10% and may be determined to be 1000 times with a probability of 90%. In addition, when the number of times of time saving is determined by lottery processing, the number of times of time saving may be determined by using the type determination random number used to determine the jackpot type and time saving type, or the number of times of time saving may be determined using a dedicated random number. You may

Moreover, if the relief time reduction determination flag is not set in step S07TM170, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time reduction end flag is set (step S07TM141). If the time saving end flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time saving end flag (step S07TM142).

Next, the CPU 103 resets one of the set time saving flags (either the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B) and terminates the time saving state (step S07TM145). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to terminate lighting of the right-handed LED (step S07TM150). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed notification termination designation command designating termination of the right-handed notification to the effect control CPU 120 (step S07TM151). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a normal state designation command (a kind of game state designation command) to the effect control CPU 120 (step S07TM152). Then, the process proceeds to step S07TM175.

It should be noted that, in this example, by executing the processing of step S07TM141 ~ step S07TM152, it shows a case where the right-handed notification is terminated with the shift to the normal state at the end of the symbol determination period in the final time-saving variation. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to shift to the normal state at the start of the fluctuation or at the start of the symbol fixed period in the time saving final fluctuation and end the right hitting notification.

Moreover, in step S07TM141, if the time saving end flag is not set (N of step S07TM141), it will transfer to step S07TM175.

In step S07TM175, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S07TM175), and ends the process as it is.

[First embodiment]
In the first embodiment, RAM clear processing is executed when power is turned on to the gaming machine at the timing when the variable display is executed for a specified number of times (100 times in this example) after power is turned on to the gaming machine or after the occurrence of a big hit. A first special suggestive effect (see FIGS. 9 to 11), which will be described later, can be executed as a special suggestive effect suggesting that it has not been done.

[Production decision processing at the start of fluctuation]
When starting variable display of special symbols, the CPU 103 executes a display result designation command for designating a display result, a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern, and a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or the second reservation storage number subtraction designation command) to the effect control CPU 120.

The effect control CPU 120 issues a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved Memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command), display result designation command that designates the display result (jackpot or lose, jackpot type in the case of a big hit), and special symbol fluctuation time and effect content (Reach and super reach, etc.) to designate a variation pattern specification command, based on the fact that received from the game control microcomputer 100, the variation display of special symbols is executed, and special It is possible to specify the fluctuation time of the pattern and the contents of the effect (reach, super reach, etc.).

The effect control CPU 120 is based on the reception of the game state designation command at the time of power failure recovery from the game control microcomputer 100, and when the game state at the time of power failure recovery is the high base state. A base flag can be set.

In the first embodiment, when the special symbol normal processing corresponding to the variable display of the next special symbol is executed in a state where the value of the relief time reduction number counter is M, (i) relief time reduction is performed in the processing of step S07TM71. By decrementing the number counter by -1, the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes "M-1", and (ii) in the process of step S07TM73, the value ("M-1") corresponding to the relief time reduction number counter is set. A command for specifying the number of times of relief is sent.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, the effect control CPU 120 receives the relief time reduction number designation command transmitted from the CPU 103 in the special symbol normal process, based on the relief time reduction number in the variable display. It is possible to specify the value of the counter.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when the variable display of the special symbols is completed and the display result is determined, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100, special symbols (first special It is possible to specify that the variable display of the symbol (or the second special symbol) has ended and the display result has been derived.

FIG. 9-9 is a flow chart showing effect determination processing executed at the start of fluctuation. The effect control CPU 120 executes the variable start time effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-9 in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-described one set of commands associated with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols is designated as a display result. A production control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the production) to be executed based on the command and the variation pattern specification command is set, and a decorative pattern based on the specified variation pattern is set. The effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) during the variable display is determined by the effect determination process at the start of variation shown in FIG. 9-9.

First, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the first fluctuation display after the power is turned on (step S07TM1000). When the power is turned on and it is not the first fluctuation display (NO in step S07TM1000), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S07TM1030.

When the power is turned on and it is the first fluctuation display (YES in step S07TM1000), the effect control CPU 120 is specified by the relief time reduction number designation command transmitted from the CPU 103 Based on the value of the relief time reduction number counter. , determines whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "899" (step S07TM1010). When the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not "899" (NO in step S07TM1010), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S07TM1030.

When the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "899" (YES in step S07TM1010), the effect control CPU 120 sets a special suggestion effect limit flag (step S07TM1020) described later, and advances the process to step S07TM1030.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the 100th fluctuation display after the power is turned on (step S07TM1030). If it is not the 100th variable display after power-on (NO in step S07TM1030), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S07TM1040.

If it is the 100th variable display after the power is turned on (YES in step S07TM1030), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special suggestion effect restriction flag is set (step S07TM1032). If the special suggestion effect restriction flag is set (YES in step S07TM1032), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S07TM1050.

If the special suggestion effect limit flag is not set (NO in step S07TM1032), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the display result determined at the start of the fluctuation, that is, the display result specified by the display result specifying command is a "big hit". ” (step S07TM1034). If the display result determined at the start of the variation, that is, the display result designated by the display result designation command is a "jackpot" (YES in step S07TM1034), the effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S07TM1050.

If the display result determined at the start of the fluctuation, that is, the display result designated by the display result designation command is not a "jackpot" (NO in step S07TM1034), the effect control CPU 120 sets the restoration high base flag. It is determined whether or not there is an address (step S07TM1036). When the restoration high base flag is set (YES in step S07TM1036), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S07TM1050.

If the restoration high base flag is not set (NO in step S07TM1036), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first special suggestive effect described later is executed and the effect mode in Table A, that is, [After power-on For 100th variation] Determine based on the table (see FIG. 9-10(A)) for determining whether or not to execute the first special suggestive effect and the mode of effect (see step S07TM1038), and proceed to step S07TM1050. It should be noted that the effect mode of the first special suggestive effect will be explained in detail in FIGS. 9-11 which will be described later.

<[For the 100th change after turning on the power] Execution/non-execution of the first special suggestion effect and effect mode determination table>
As shown in FIG. 9-10(A), [For the 100th change after turning on the power] In the execution/non-execution of the first special suggestion effect and effect mode determination table, whether or not the RAM clear processing specified by the initialization command is executed and the value of the relief time-saving counter designated by the relief time-saving number-of-times designation command, a determination value for determining whether or not to execute the first special suggestion performance and the performance mode is assigned.

When the execution/non-execution of the RAM clearing process is "no execution", the production control CPU 120 performs B mode (blue effect image , and decides to execute the first special suggestive effect of C mode (character C with a red effect image) at a rate of 60%. .

The effect control CPU 120 performs the first special suggestive effect at a rate of 10% when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "200 to 399" in the case where the RAM clear process is executed or not is "not executed". Decided not to execute, decided to execute the first special suggestive effect of mode A (character A with a white effect image) at a rate of 5%, and mode B (with a blue effect image) at a rate of 70% It is decided to execute the first special suggestive effect of the accompanying character B), and to execute the first special suggestive effect of the C mode (character C accompanied by the red effect image) at a rate of 15%.

The effect control CPU 120 performs the first special suggestion effect at a rate of 20% when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "400 to 699" in the case where the RAM clearing process is executed or not is "not executed". Decided not to execute, decided to execute the first special suggestive effect of mode A (character A with white effect image) at a rate of 30%, mode B (with a blue effect image) at a rate of 50% It is decided to execute the first special suggestive effect of the accompanying character B).

The performance control CPU 120 performs the first special suggestion performance at a rate of 30% when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "700 to 800" in the case where the RAM clearing process is executed or not is "not executed". Decided not to execute, decided to execute the first special suggestive effect of mode A (character A with white effect image) at a rate of 40%, mode B (with a blue effect image) at a rate of 30% It is decided to execute the first special suggestive effect of the accompanying character B).

If the presence or absence of execution of the RAM clearing process is "executed" (at this time, the value of the relief time reduction counter is a fixed value of "800"), the CPU 120 for effect control gives the first special suggestion at a rate of 40% Decided not to execute the effect, decided to execute the first special suggestion effect of A mode (character A with white effect image) at a rate of 50%, and performed B mode (blue effect image) at a rate of 10% It is decided to execute the first special suggestive effect of character B) with an image.

In this embodiment, it is assumed that an initialization designation command is transmitted as the effect control command for instructing initialization transmitted in step S9 of the game control main process. Based on this initialization designation command, the restoration initialization flag can be set. This restoration initialization flag is erased at a predetermined timing (the timing when the next big hit occurs, the timing when the relief time is reached, the timing when the power is turned off, etc.).

After determining YES in step S07TM1010, if the recovery initialization flag is not set, the special suggestion effect restriction flag is set, and the process proceeds to step S07TM1030 and after. Further, if the recovery initialization flag is set after the determination of YES in step S07TM1010, the process of setting the special suggestion effect limit flag is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S07TM1030 and after.

Here, the fact that the special suggestion effect restriction flag is set means that the power has been turned off without executing the variable display even once after the RAM clearing process was executed (initialized) when the power was turned on. After that, the power was turned on again, and the RAM clear processing was not executed when the power was turned on again (as a result, the reset initialization flag was not set). By skipping the process (step S07TM1038) for determining whether or not to execute the first special suggestive effect, the execution of the first special suggestive effect is restricted. This special suggestion effect restriction flag is erased at a predetermined timing (the timing when the next big hit occurs, the timing when the relief time is reached, the timing when the power is turned off, etc.).

Further, when the power is turned on and it is not the 100th variation display (NO in step S07TM1030), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the 100th variation display after the big hit (that is, it is transmitted from the CPU 103). (step S07TM1040). When the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not "800" (NO in step S07TM1040), effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S07TM1050.

If the value of the relief time reduction counter is “800” instead of the 100th fluctuation display after the power is turned on (NO in step S07TM1030 → YES in step S07TM1040), the This is the 100th variable display after being controlled to the fixed state. Hereinafter, this [100th fluctuation display after being controlled to a low probability state after a big hit] is referred to as [100th fluctuation display after a big hit] or [100th fluctuation after a big hit]. shall be

When the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "800" (YES in step S07TM1040), the effect control CPU 120 determines the display result determined at the start of the fluctuation, that is, the display result specified by the display result specifying command. It is determined whether or not it is a "jackpot" (step S07TM1044). If the display result determined at the start of the variation, that is, the display result designated by the display result designation command is "big win" (YES in step S07TM1044), the effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S07TM1050.

If the display result determined at the start of the fluctuation, that is, the display result specified by the display result specifying command is not a "jackpot" (NO in step S07TM1044), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first special suggestion effect is executed. And the effect mode is determined based on Table A, that is, the table for determining whether or not to execute the first special suggestion effect [for the 100th variation after the big hit] and the effect mode (see FIG. 9-10 (B)). (Step S07TM1048), the process proceeds to step S07TM1050.

<[For the 100th variation after the big hit] Execution/non-execution of the first special suggestion effect and effect mode determination table>
As shown in FIG. 9-10 (B), [for the 100th variation after the big hit] execution presence/absence of the first special suggestion effect and effect mode determination table, execution/non-execution of the RAM clearing process specified by the initialization command A judgment value for determining whether or not the first special suggestive effect is executed and the effect mode is assigned according to the value of the remedy time-saving number counter specified by the remedy time-saving number specifying command.

Effect control CPU120, when the execution presence or absence of the RAM clear process is "no execution" (at this time, the value of the relief time reduction counter is a fixed value of "800"), the first special suggestion at a rate of 70% Decided not to execute the effect, decided to execute the first special suggestion effect of A mode (character A with white effect image) at a rate of 5%, and performed B mode (blue effect image) at a rate of 10% Decided to execute the first special suggestive effect of character B) with an image, and decided to execute the first special suggestive effect of C mode (character C with a red effect image) at a rate of 15%. do.

If the presence or absence of execution of the RAM clearing process is "executed" (at this time, the value of the relief time reduction counter is a fixed value of "800"), the effect control CPU 120 gives the first special suggestion at a rate of 80% Decided not to execute the effect, decided to execute the first special suggestion effect of A mode (character A with white effect image) at a rate of 15%, and performed B mode (blue effect image) at a rate of 5% Decided to execute the first special suggestive effect of character B) with an image, and decided to execute the first special suggestive effect of C mode (character C with a red effect image) at a rate of 0%. do.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "10" or less based on the value of the relief time reduction number counter specified by the relief time reduction number designation command transmitted from the CPU 103. (Step S07TM1050). When the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not equal to or less than "10" (NO in step S07TM1050), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is equal to or less than "10" (YES in step S07TM1050), the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect mode of the countdown effect described later in a table for determining the effect mode of the countdown effect ( 9-10(C)) (step S07TM1060), and the process proceeds to step S07TM1070.

<Production mode determination table for countdown production>
As shown in FIG. 9-10 (C), in the countdown production effect mode determination table, according to the value of the relief time reduction number counter specified by the relief time reduction number designation command, for determining the production mode of the countdown effect Judgment value is assigned.

The effect control CPU 120 determines that the character information of the countdown display in the countdown effect is set to "n times left until play time" when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "n".

For example, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "10", the effect control CPU 120 determines that the character information of the countdown display in the countdown effect is "10 times to play time", and the relief time reduction number counter is "0", it is determined that the character information of the countdown display in the countdown effect is "0 times left until play time".

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "0" based on the value of the relief time reduction number counter designated by the relief time reduction number designation command transmitted from the CPU 103. (Step S07TM1070). When the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not "0" (NO in step S07TM1070), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "0" (YES in step S07TM1070), the effect control CPU 120 determines the display result determined at the start of the fluctuation, that is, the display result specified by the display result specifying command. It is determined whether or not it is a "jackpot" (step S07TM1080). If the display result determined at the start of variation, that is, the display result designated by the display result designation command is "big hit" (YES in step S07TM1080), effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the display result determined at the start of the fluctuation, that is, the display result specified by the display result specifying command is not a "jackpot" (NO in step S07TM1080), the effect control CPU 120 executes the relief time reduction effect described later. (Step S07TM1090), and it is determined whether or not it is decided to execute the first special suggestion effect (Step S07TM1100).

When it is not determined to execute the first special suggestive effect (NO in step S07TM1100), the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the relief time-saving effect at normal timing (step S07TM1110), and continues as it is. End the process.

When it is determined to execute the first special suggestive effect (YES in step S07TM1100), the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the relief time-saving effect at special timing (step S07TM1120), and continues as it is. End the process.

[1st Special Suggestion Effect]
In the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the reception of the variable pattern designation command and the display result designation command. 2 seconds after the start), the first special suggestion effect can be executed as the special suggestion effect. This first special suggestive effect is determined whether or not to execute and the effect mode based on the determination at the start of fluctuation (effect determination process at the start of fluctuation), and whether or not RAM clear processing is executed at the time of power restoration, and until the relief time is reached. It is a kind of production that suggests the number of fluctuations.

In the first special suggestion effect, the character including the effect image is gradually enlarged and displayed. In this example, it is assumed that the images are displayed in two sizes. When the first special suggestive effect is executed, (1) first, a character including a small effect image (hereinafter referred to as a character (small)) is displayed in the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5, and (2) Next, (timing 1.5 seconds after the start of the effect of (1)=timing 3.5 seconds after the start of the variation), a large effect image is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. It is assumed that the character (hereinafter referred to as "character (large)") is displayed.

In the first embodiment, there are a plurality of rendering modes in which characters displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 are different as the rendering mode of the first special suggestive rendering. When it is determined to execute the first special suggestive effect in the fluctuation start effect determination process, the effect modes of the first special suggestive effect are "A mode", "B mode", and "C mode". is determined to be one of the production modes.

In the first special suggestion effect of the A mode, character A (character A (small) 07TM100a, character A (large) 07TM100A) including a white effect image is displayed.

In the first special suggestion effect of B mode, character B (character B (small) 07TM100b, character B (large) 07TM100B) including a blue effect image is displayed.

In the first special suggestion effect of the C mode, character C (character C (small) 07TM100c, character C (large) 07TM100C) including a red effect image is displayed.

In the first embodiment, the character in the first special suggestion effect has a higher display priority than other effect images (decoration pattern, background image, etc.), and an effect image that can be emphasized more than other effect images is displayed. Since it is included, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the first special suggestion effect is being executed. The character in the first special suggestion production is a character that is different from the character used in the production image used in the production that suggests a big hit (for example, the characters that appear in Super Reach A and Super Reach B). It is a character that is never used), and by executing the first special suggestion performance, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that a big win is suggested.

[Special display change effect]
In the first embodiment, when the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state), a first background image 07TM210 representing a sunny landscape including the sun and mountains is used as the background image of the decoration pattern. is displayed, and in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5, (A) the number of fluctuations executed after being controlled to the low probability state after turning on the power, or (B) the number of times executed after being controlled to the low probability state after the big hit A special display corresponding to the number of times of variation (in this example, characters such as "game 0", "game 100", etc.) is displayed.

In the above-described embodiment, when the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability / low base state), an example is shown in which the special display is displayed, but not limited to such a form, the game state is time saving A special display may be displayed when it is controlled by a state (low probability / high base state = time saving state A, time saving state B, working time saving state C etc. which are mentioned below).

For example, if the characters "game 100 times" are indicated as the character information of the special display, (A) the number of fluctuations executed after being controlled to the low probability state after turning on the power is the 100th time, Or (B) it indicates that the number of fluctuations executed after being controlled to the low-probability state after the big hit is the 100th.

At the timing when the effect control CPU 120 ends the first special suggestive effect as the special suggestive effect, the special display change effect can be executed. In this special display change effect, there are a plurality of effect modes with different display modes of the special display, and the effect mode is determined in relation to the effect mode of the first special suggestive effect executed immediately before (A mode, B mode, C mode). By changing the display mode of the special display, this special display change effect indicates whether or not the RAM clear processing is executed at the time of power restoration suggested by the first special suggestion effect, and the number of times of change until reaching the rescue time reduction. It is a kind of directing that continuously suggests.

In the first embodiment, when the special display change effect is executed, the display mode of the special display changes over the period until the variable display ends. Note that when the special display change effect is executed, it is not limited to the configuration in which the display mode of the special display changes over the period until the change display ends, and when the special display change effect is executed, the change The display mode of the special display may be changed even after the display is finished. For example, when the special display change effect is executed, the display mode of the special display may be changed over the period until the next big hit occurs or the period until the relief time is reached. Also, if the display mode of the special display changes over the period until the next big hit occurs or the period until the relief time is reached, the degree of expectation of the big hit such as Super Reach A or Super Reach B The special display may be hidden or changed to a display mode before the change when the effect with a high value is executed. Specifically, at the timing of developing to Super Reach A or Super Reach B, the special display is hidden or changed to the display mode before the change, and if it becomes a big hit, it remains until the fluctuation ends (or the big hit ends until the next change starts), the non-display or the display mode before the change may be continued. Also, in the event of a loss, after notifying the loss of Super Reach A or Super Reach B (battle defeat), the special display will be changed at the timing when the background of Super Reach A or Super Reach B returns to the normal background. What is necessary is just to display again in a display mode. In addition, after once notifying that it will be a loss (after temporarily stopping with a losing pattern), when executing an effect (relief effect) for notifying that it will be a big hit by changing the pattern again, the special display is not displayed. Or, if you change the display mode to the one before the change, you can recognize that it will be a big hit before the relief effect is executed, so just like the case of losing, the background of Super Reach A or Super Reach B has returned to the normal background. The special display may be displayed again in the changed display mode at the timing, and may be hidden again or changed to the display mode before the change when the relief effect is executed.

When the first special suggestive effect of the A mode is executed, at the timing when the first special suggestive effect ends, the special display change effect of the A mode related to the first special suggestive effect of the A mode is executed, The special display in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 changes to the A-mode special display. In the A mode special display, a white effect image is displayed around the special display in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5, and the character A is displayed behind the special display.

When the first special suggestive effect of the B mode is executed, at the timing when the first special suggestive effect ends, the special display change effect of the B mode related to the first special suggestive effect of the B mode is executed, The special display in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 changes to the B-mode special display. In the special display of mode B, a blue effect image is displayed around the special display in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5, and the character B is displayed behind the special display.

When the C-mode first special suggestive effect is executed, the C-mode special display change effect related to the C-mode first special suggestive effect is executed at the timing when the first special suggestive effect is completed. . In the C-mode special display change effect, unlike the A-mode and B-mode first special display change effects, the special display in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 changes to the C-mode special display. The special display is an image corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is reached (in this example, characters such as "800 times until play time"). In addition, in the special display of mode C, a red effect image is displayed around the special display in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5, and the character C is displayed behind the special display.

<Production example of the first special suggestion production>
FIGS. 9-11 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 when the first special suggestion effect and the special display change effect are executed, and FIG. 9-11 (2A) to FIG. (4A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the first special suggestion effect of the A mode and the special display change effect of the A mode are executed; FIG. -11 (2B) to (4B) are explanations showing examples of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 when the first special suggestion effect of the B mode and the special display change effect of the B mode are executed. FIG. 9-11 (2C) to (4C) are effects displayed on the image display device 5 when the first special suggestion effect of the C mode and the special display change effect of the C mode are executed. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an image;

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (1), based on the CPU 103 starting the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 controls the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and the variable display of small patterns is started in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG. At this time, in the active display area 07TM013, the active display 07TM003 of the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is displayed, and based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4, the first reserved display area In 07TM011, four first pending displays 07TM001 are displayed. Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first background image 07TM210 as the background image of the decoration pattern.

At this time, since the first reserved memory number is 4, the effect control CPU 120 displays the character "4" in the first reserved memory number display area 07TM041 of the image display device 5, and displays the second reserved memory number. is 0, the character "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number display area 07TM042 of the image display device 5. FIG. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays a special display 07TM150 (in this example, the characters "game 100 times") on the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 .

(When the first special suggestion effect of A mode is executed)
As shown in FIG. 9-11 (2A), at the timing when two seconds have passed since the CPU 103 started the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first special suggestion effect of the A mode. , the character A (small) 07TM100a is displayed on the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 .

Character A (small) 07TM100a is an image with a higher display priority than the decorative pattern (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground), and the decorative pattern has a higher display priority than the background image ( This is an image in which the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the player's point of view, it appears that the character A (small) 07TM100a, the decoration pattern, and the background image are displayed in this order from the front to the back.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (3A), at the timing when 3.5 seconds have passed since the CPU 103 started the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 performs the first special suggestion of the A mode. The effect is continuously executed, the character A (small) 07TM100a is erased from the center portion of the screen of the image display device 5, and the character A (large) 07TM100A is displayed.

The character A (large) 07TM100A is an image with a higher display priority than the decorative pattern (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground), and the decorative pattern has a higher display priority than the background image ( This is an image in which the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, it seems to the player that the character A (large) 07TM100A, the decoration pattern, and the background image are displayed in this order from the front to the back.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (4A), at the timing when the first special suggestive effect should end, the effect control CPU 120 ends the first special suggestive effect, and The character A (large) 07TM100A is erased, the A-mode special display change effect related to the A-mode first special suggestion effect is executed, and the special display 07TM150 at the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 is changed to the A-mode special display. Change the display to 07TM150A.

The special display 07TM150A of the A mode is an image with a higher display priority than the decorative pattern (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground), and the special display 07TM150A of the A mode has a higher display priority than the decorative pattern. This is an image with a high degree of resolution (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the player's point of view, it appears that the special display 07TM150A of the A mode and the decoration pattern are displayed in this order from the front to the back.

Next, at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation designation command, terminates the special display change effect, and changes the A mode at the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5. Special display 07TM150A is changed to special display 07TM150.

(When the first special suggestion effect of B mode is executed)
As shown in FIG. 9-11 (2B), at the timing when two seconds have passed since the CPU 103 started the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first special suggestion effect of the B mode. , the character B (small) 07TM100b is displayed on the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 .

Character B (small) 07TM100b is an image with a higher display priority than the decorative pattern (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground), and the decorative pattern has a higher display priority than the background image ( This is an image in which the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, it seems to the player that the character B (small) 07TM100b, the decoration pattern, and the background image are displayed in this order from the front to the back.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (3B), at the timing when 3.5 seconds have passed since the CPU 103 started the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 performs the first special suggestion of the B mode. The effect is continuously executed, the character B (small) 07TM100b is erased from the center portion of the screen of the image display device 5, and the character B (large) 07TM100B is displayed.

Character B (Large) 07TM100B is an image with a higher display priority than the decorative pattern (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground), and the decorative pattern has a higher display priority than the background image ( This is an image in which the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, it appears to the player that the character B (large) 07TM100B, the decoration pattern, and the background image are displayed in this order from the front to the back.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (4B), at the timing when the first special suggestive effect should end, the effect control CPU 120 ends the first special suggestive effect, and The character B (large) 07TM100B is erased, the B-mode special display change effect related to the B-mode first special suggestion effect is executed, and the special display 07TM150 at the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 is changed to the B-mode special display. The display is changed to 07TM150B.

The special display 07TM150B of the B mode is an image with a higher display priority than the decorative pattern (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in front), and the special display 07TM150B of the B mode has a higher display priority than the decorative pattern. This is an image with a high degree of resolution (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the player's point of view, it appears that the character B (large) 07TM100B and the decoration pattern are displayed in this order from the front to the back.

Next, at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command terminates the special display change effect, and changes the B mode in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5. The special display 07TM150B is changed to the special display 07TM150.

(When the first special suggestion effect of C mode is executed)
As shown in FIG. 9-11 (2C), at the timing when two seconds have passed since the CPU 103 started the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first special suggestion effect of the C mode. , the character C (small) 07TM100c is displayed on the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 .

The character C (small) 07TM100c is an image with a higher display priority than the decorative pattern (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground), and the decorative pattern has a higher display priority than the background image ( This is an image in which the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, it appears to the player that the character C (small) 07TM100c, the decoration pattern, and the background image are displayed in this order from the front to the back.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (3C), at the timing when 3.5 seconds have passed since the CPU 103 started the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 performs the first special suggestion of the C mode. The effect is continuously executed, the character B (small) 07TM100c is erased from the center portion of the screen of the image display device 5, and the character C (large) 07TM100C is displayed.

The character C (large) 07TM100C is an image having a higher display priority than the decorative pattern (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground), and the character C (large) 07TM100C has a higher display priority than the decorative pattern. This is an image with a high degree of resolution (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the player's point of view, it appears that the character C (large) 07TM100C and the decoration pattern are displayed in this order from the front to the back.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (4C), at the timing when the first special suggestive effect should end, the effect control CPU 120 ends the first special suggestive effect, and The character C (large) 07TM100C is erased, the C-mode special display change effect related to the C-mode first special suggestion effect is executed, and the special display 07TM150 at the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 is changed to the C-mode special effect. Change the display to 07TM160C.

The C-mode special display 07TM160C is an image with a higher display priority than the decorative pattern (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground), and the C-mode special display 07TM160C has a higher display priority than the decorative pattern. This is an image with a high degree of resolution (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the player's point of view, it appears that the C mode special display 07TM160C and the decoration pattern are displayed in this order from the front to the back.

Next, at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command terminates the special display change effect, and changes to the C mode in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5. The special display 07TM150C is changed to the special display 07TM150.

[Countdown effect]
In the first embodiment, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 to 10, the countdown effect can be executed at the timing 0.5 seconds after the start of the variable display. This countdown production is a type of production that indicates the number of fluctuations until reaching relief time reduction, with the production mode determined based on the determination at the start of fluctuation (production determination processing at the start of fluctuation).

In the countdown effect in the first embodiment, the countdown is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 in a manner corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction number counter (in this example, the characters "XX times to play time", XX = 0 to 10) is displayed.

The countdown display is an image that has a higher display priority than the decorative pattern and the background image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, it seems to the player that the countdown display, the decoration pattern and the background image are displayed in this order from the front to the back.

[Relief time reduction performance]
In the first embodiment, at the time of reaching the relief time reduction (variation display where the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0), the timing when the fluctuation ends from the timing (normal timing, special timing described later) after a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the fluctuation In the period until, it is possible to execute the relief time reduction arrival production. This relief time saving effect is a kind of effect that indicates whether or not to execute is determined based on the determination at the start of fluctuation (effect determination process at the time of fluctuation start) and that the relief time saving has been reached.

<Front stage production, middle stage production, and rear stage production in the reduction of relief time arrival production>
The relief time-saving arrival production in the first embodiment is composed of a front stage production, a middle stage production, and a rear stage production.

(Preceding stage production in relief time reduction arrival production)
In the front stage effect in the relief time reduction reach effect, the first reach display (gray characters of “activate play time”) is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 . At this time, the first reaching display is an image having a higher display priority than the decoration pattern and the background image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, it seems to the player that the first arrival display, the decoration pattern and the background image are displayed in this order.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the first arrival display is an image including gray characters, and the first arrival display has a higher display priority than the decorative pattern and the background image. Regardless of the form, the first arrival display is an image containing semi-transparent characters, and the first arrival display has a lower display priority than the decoration pattern and the background image, or the first arrival display and the decoration pattern. and the background image may have the same display priority.

(Middle stage production in relief time reduction arrival production)
In the middle stage production (door production) in the relief time reduction arrival production, first, the first arrival display is erased from the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the first arrival display is visible in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The second arrival display (black characters of “activate play time”) in a high-quality mode is displayed, and the arrival door image (in this example, an image imitating a golden door) is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. be. However, at this time, the arrival door image is an image having a higher display priority than the second arrival display (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in front). Therefore, it seems to the player that only the arrival door image is being displayed.

At this time, the special display 07TM150 in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, the characters “game 900 times” based on the fact that the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0) is a special display of the arrival mode It has changed to 07TM150D (in this example, the characters of "Game MAX" in a mode suggesting that it is controlled to the relief time saving state). However, at this time, the arrival door image is an image that has a higher display priority than the special display (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, it seems to the player that only the arrival door image is being displayed.

Then, the arrival door image (in this example, an image simulating a golden door) displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 is displayed as an animation of the door opening from the near side to the far side. At this time, only in the area where the arrival door image is not displayed by the animation of the arrival door image in the screen of the image display device 5 (hereinafter referred to as the first specific area), A part of the displayed second arrival display (black characters of “play time activation”) and a special display 07TM150D at the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, suggesting that it is controlled to the relief time saving state. characters of "Game MAX" in the mode to be played) and become visible.

(Later stage production in relief time reduction arrival production)
In the latter production in the relief time reduction arrival production, the arrival door image (in this example, an image imitating a golden door) is erased from the screen of the image display device 5, and the second arrival display at the center of the screen of the image display device 5. (Black characters of "play time activation") and the special display 07TM150D at the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, the character of "Game MAX" in a mode suggesting that it is controlled to the relief time saving state ) and becomes visible, and the relief time-saving arrival effect ends at the timing when the variable display ends.

<Execution timing of relief time reduction arrival production>
In the first embodiment, there are normal timing and special timing as the execution (start) timing of the relief time reduction attainment effect. In this example, the normal timing is the timing two seconds after the start of the variable display, and the special timing is the timing six seconds after the start of the variable display.

In the first embodiment, the relief time reduction effect is generally executed at normal timing, but as shown in steps S07TM1100, step S07TM1110, and step S07TM1120 of the variation start time effect determination process, when the relief time reduction is reached Only in the case of executing the first special suggestive effect in the variable display, the relief time reduction reaching effect is executed at special timing.

In this way, by providing a plurality of execution timings of the relief time-saving arrival performance, the execution timing of the first special suggestive performance (timing two seconds after the start of the variable display) is made common in any situation. be able to.

<Countdown production, production example of relief time reduction production>
FIGS. 9-12 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the countdown effect and the relief time-saving effect are executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-12 (1), based on the fact that the CPU 103 has started the variable display of the first special symbol (the variable display when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 10), the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of decorative patterns in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5, and starts variable display of small patterns in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5. I am letting At this time, in the active display area 07TM013, the active display 07TM003 of the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is displayed, and based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4, the first reserved display area In 07TM011, four first pending displays 07TM001 are displayed. Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first background image 07TM210 as the background image of the decoration pattern. At this time, since the first reserved memory number is 4, the effect control CPU 120 displays the character "4" in the first reserved memory number display area 07TM041 of the image display device 5, and displays the second reserved memory number. is 0, the character "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number display area 07TM042 of the image display device 5. FIG.

Then, at the timing of 0.5 seconds after the start of the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 executes the countdown effect, and the countdown display 07TM310 (in this example, "Until play time" is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 10 more times") is displayed.

At this time, based on the fact that the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 10, the effect control CPU 120 displays a special display 07TM150 (in this example, the characters "game 891 times") in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5. I am displaying.

Next, based on the CPU 103 executing the variable display of the first special symbol (variable display when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1 to 9), the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the relief time reduction number counter. It is assumed that the countdown effect is executed in a corresponding mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (2), the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (variable display when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0) and the timing after 0.5 seconds have passed Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes a countdown effect and causes the image display device 5 to display a countdown display 07TM300 (in this example, the characters "0 times left until play time") on the center of the screen.

At this time, based on the fact that the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays a special display 07TM150 (in this example, the characters “900 times of the game”) on the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5. I am displaying.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (3), at the timing (normal timing in this example) to start the relief time-saving effect, the effect control CPU 120 executes the preceding stage effect in the relief time-saving effect. A first arrival display 07TM350A (gray characters of "exercise play time") is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. FIG. The first reaching display is an image having a higher display priority than the decoration pattern and the background image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, it seems to the player that the first arrival display, the decoration pattern and the background image are displayed in this order.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (4), at the timing to execute the middle stage effect (door effect) in the relief time reduction effect, the effect control CPU 120 executes the middle stage effect in the relief time reduction effect, and the image The first arrival display 07TM350A is erased from the central portion of the screen of the display device 5, and the arrival door image 07TM360 (in this example, an image imitating a golden door) is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. FIG. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 erases the four first reservation displays 07TM001 from the first reservation display area 07TM011.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the second reaching display 07TM350B (black characters of "exercise play time") having higher visibility than the first reaching display in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the image Special display 07TM150 (in this example, the characters “game 900 times” based on the fact that the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0) in the lower right part of the screen of the display device 5 Special display 07TM150D (this example Then, it is changed to the character of "Game MAX" in a mode suggesting that it is controlled in a relief time saving state. However, the arrival door image 07TM360 is an image having a higher display priority than the second arrival display 07TM350B and the arrival mode special display 07TM150D (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in front). Therefore, it seems to the player that only the arrival door image 07TM360 is being displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (5), the effect control CPU 120 is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 over the period during which the middle stage effect (door effect) in the relief time reduction effect should be executed. The arrival door image 07TM360 that has been displayed is displayed as an animation in which the door opens from the front to the back. At this time, only in the first specific area 07TM360E, a part of the second arrival display (black characters of "activate play time") displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 and the right side of the screen of the image display device 5 Special display 07TM150D at the bottom (in this example, characters of "Game MAX" in a mode suggesting that it is controlled to the relief time saving state), active display 07TM003 in the active display area 07TM013, and the second as a background image of the decorative pattern 1 and part of the background image 07TM210 are visible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (6), the effect control CPU 120 erases the arrival door image 07TM360 from the screen of the image display device 5 at the timing to execute the latter effect in the relief time-saving arrival effect. At this time, the whole of the second arrival display 07TM350B (black characters of "play time activation") in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 and the special display 07TM150D in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, the relief time reduction characters of "Game MAX" suggesting that the state is controlled), the active display 07TM003 of the active display area 07TM013, and the entirety of the first background image 07TM210 as the background image of the decorative pattern are visible. It's becoming

Then, at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command erases the active display 07TM003 from the active display area 07TM013, and displays the small symbol on the image display device 5. In areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, a combination of small symbols ("245" in this example) is fixed and stopped. That is, the combination of small symbols that result in a display result of "loss" is determined and stopped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (7), when the game state is controlled to the time saving state B (relief time saving state = play time), the effect control CPU 120 uses the night sky and the moon as the background image of the decoration pattern. A fourth background image 07TM240 including stars is displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the characters “play time” in the upper left part of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the remaining time saving in the upper center part of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, “999 times remaining”). character) is displayed, and the right-handed promotion image 07TM370 is always displayed on the upper right portion of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 erases the arrival mode special display 07TM150D from the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 based on the game state being controlled to the time saving state B.

At this time, in the state where the game state is controlled to the time saving state B, based on the fact that the second reserved memory number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays a message to the player in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. A special right-handed promotion image 07TM380 is displayed to prompt the player to hit right-handed.

At this time, based on the fact that the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is 4, based on the CPU 103 starting the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 , in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, small patterns are displayed in a variable manner. At this time, since the first reserved memory number is 3, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved memory number display area 07TM041 of the image display device 5 to display the character "3".

At this time, in the active display area 07TM013, the active display 07TM003 of the normal mode corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol currently being executed is displayed. On the other hand, based on the fact that the game state is controlled to the time saving state B, the first reservation display is not displayed in the first reservation display area 07TM011 although the first reservation storage number is 3.

Next, while the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, one game ball wins the second start winning hole, and the variable display of the first special symbol is at the timing when the CPU 103 should end the variable display. shall be terminated.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (8), based on the CPU 103 starting the variable display of the second special symbol (variable display corresponding to the second reservation storage), the effect control CPU 120 is the image In the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the display device 5, the variable display of decorative patterns is executed, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns is executed. there is At this time, the effect control CPU 120 erases the special right-handed promotion image 07TM380 from the center portion of the screen of the image display device 5 .

And, while the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the second special symbol, it is assumed that four game balls have won the second starting winning hole.

At this time, since the second reserved memory number is 4, the effect control CPU 120 causes the second reserved memory number display area 07TM042 of the image display device 5 to display the character "4". At this time, in the active display area 07TM013, the active display 07TM003 in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is displayed, and based on the fact that the second reserved storage number is 4, the second reserved display area In 07TM012, four second pending displays 07TM002 are displayed.

[Example of production when the first special suggestive production is not executed]
9-13 and 9-14, the execution timing of each effect and an example of effect when the first special suggestion effect is not executed in each variation pattern will be described. In this example, among the cases where the first special suggestion effect is not executed, (A) when the variation pattern is "non-reach failure", (B) when the variation pattern is "normal reach failure", (C) variation A case in which the pattern is "missing super reach A" will be described.

In the 100th fluctuation display after the power is turned on, the case where it is decided not to execute the first special suggestive effect is because (A1) the special suggestive effect limit flag has been set in the process for determining the effect at the time of fluctuation start. If the processing for determining whether or not to execute the first special suggestion effect is skipped (YES in step S07TM1032 → step S07TM1038 is skipped), If the process for determining whether or not to execute is skipped (YES in step S07TM1034 → step S07TM1038 is skipped), and (C1) whether or not the first special suggestive effect is to be executed is determined because the high base flag at recovery has been set. (YES in step S07TM1036 → step S07TM1038 is skipped), and (D1) the special suggestive effect restriction flag is not set, the display result is not a "jackpot", and the recovery time high base flag is not set, the process for determining whether or not to execute the first special suggestive effect is executed, but it is decided not to execute the first special suggestive effect (NO in step S07TM1032 → NO in step S07TM1034 → step S07TM1036 NO → step S07TM1038, if it is decided not to execute the first special suggestive effect).

In addition, in the 100th variation display after the big hit, the case where it is decided not to execute the first special suggestive effect means that (B2) the display result is "big hit" in the process of determining the effect at the start of the variation. When skipping the process of determining whether or not to execute 1 special suggestive effect (YES in step S07TM1044 → skipping step S07TM1048), and (D2) when the display result is not "big win", the first special suggestive effect is executed. There is a case where it is decided not to execute the first special suggestive effect even though the presence/absence determination process is executed (NO in step S07TM1044 → when it is decided not to execute the first special suggestive effect in step S07TM1048).

In the 100th variation display after turning on the power and the 100th variation display after the big hit, if the first special suggestion effect is not executed, the above-mentioned (A1) to (D1), (B2) and ( D2) is possible, but since the execution timing of each effect and the example of effect when the first special suggestive effect is not executed in each variation pattern are common, the time chart and explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect image are common. It is assumed that the

<Example of production in case of (A)>
FIG. 9-13(A) is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the variation pattern is determined to be "non-reach out" in the case where the first special suggestive effect is not executed. 14(1) and 14(2A) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images related to each of these effects.

As shown in FIG. 9-14 (1), based on the CPU 103 starting the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 9-13 (A)), the effect control CPU 120 , in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns is started. ing. At this time, in the active display area 07TM013, the active display 07TM003 of the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is displayed, and based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4, the first reserved display area In 07TM011, four first pending displays 07TM001 are displayed. Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first background image 07TM210 as the background image of the decoration pattern.

At this time, since the first reserved memory number is 4, the effect control CPU 120 displays the character "4" in the first reserved memory number display area 07TM041 of the image display device 5, and displays the second reserved memory number. is 0, the character "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number display area 07TM042 of the image display device 5. FIG. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays a special display 07TM150 (in this example, the characters "game 100 times") on the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 .

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-14 (2A), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T2A shown in FIG. 9-13 (A)), the symbol confirmation designation command is received. The effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 07TM003 from the active display area 07TM013, and in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the final combination of decorative patterns ("245" in this example) is fixed and stopped. At this time, the final combination of small symbols ("245" in this example) is determined and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c and 5r. That is, the combination of small symbols that result in a display result of "loss" is determined and stopped.

<Example of production in case of (B)>
FIG. 9-13(B) is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the variation pattern is determined to be "normal reach lost" in the case where the first special suggestive effect is not executed, and FIG. 9-14. (1) and (2B) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images related to these effects.

The production configuration in FIG. 9-14 (1) is the same as the production configuration in each production when the variation pattern is determined to be "non-reach out" in the case where the first special suggestive production is not executed. omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-14 (2B), in a state where the reach state in the variation pattern is established, at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the first special symbol (in FIG. 9-13 (B) At the timing of T2B shown), the effect control CPU 120 that has received the design determination designation command erases the active display 07TM003 from the active display area 07TM013, and in the design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the final The combination of decorative symbols ("212" in this example) is fixed and stopped. At this time, the final combination of small symbols ("212" in this example) is determined and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. That is, the combination of small symbols that result in a display result of "loss" is determined and stopped.

<Example of production in case of (C)>
FIG. 9-13(C) is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the variation pattern is determined to be "super reach A lost" in the case where the first special suggestive effect is not executed. -14 (1) and (2C) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images related to each of these effects.

The production configuration in FIG. 9-14 (1) is the same as the production configuration in each production when the variation pattern is determined to be "non-reach out" in the case where the first special suggestive production is not executed. omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-14 (2C), in the state of developing to super reach in the variation pattern (in this example, the state in which the defeat effect is being executed in the super reach A effect), the CPU 103 first At the timing of ending the variable display of the special symbols (at the timing of T2C shown in FIG. 9-13(C)), the effect control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command erases the active display 07TM003 from the active display area 07TM013. , in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the final combination of decorative patterns ("212" in this example) is fixed and stopped. At this time, the final combination of small symbols ("212" in this example) is determined and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. That is, the combination of small symbols that result in a display result of "loss" is determined and stopped.

In the defeat rendering, the image display device 5 displays the character 07TM390A defeated by the enemy character 07TM390B, and the characters "defeat" are displayed in the center of the image display device 5.例文帳に追加

[Example of production when the first special suggestive production is executed]
9-15 and 9-16, the execution timing of each effect and an example of effect when the first special suggestive effect is executed in each variation pattern will be described. In this example, of the cases where the first special suggestive effect is executed, (A) when the variation pattern is "no reach", (B) when the variation pattern is "normal reach", (C) variation A case in which the pattern is "missing super reach A" will be described.

<Example of production in case of (A)>
FIG. 9-15(A) is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the variation pattern is determined to be "no reach out" in the case where the first special suggestive effect is executed. -16 (1) to (4) and (5A) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images related to each of these effects.

As shown in FIG. 9-16 (1), based on the CPU 103 starting the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 9-15 (A)), the effect control CPU 120 , in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns is started. ing. At this time, in the active display area 07TM013, the active display 07TM003 of the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is displayed, and based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4, the first reserved display area In 07TM011, four first pending displays 07TM001 are displayed. Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first background image 07TM210 as the background image of the decoration pattern.

At this time, since the first reserved memory number is 4, the effect control CPU 120 displays the character "4" in the first reserved memory number display area 07TM041 of the image display device 5, and displays the second reserved memory number. is 0, the character "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number display area 07TM042 of the image display device 5. FIG. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays a special display 07TM150 (in this example, the characters "game 100 times") on the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 .

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-16 (2), at the timing two seconds after the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T2 shown in FIG. 9-15 (A)), The effect control CPU 120 executes the first special suggestive effect of the A mode, and displays the character A (small) 07TM100a on the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 .

The layer configuration for the effect image is the same as that described in FIGS. 9-11, so the description is omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-16 (3), at the timing 3.5 seconds after the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 9-15), the production The control CPU 120 continues to execute the first special suggestion effect of the A mode, and causes the character A (large) 07TM100A to be displayed in the central portion of the screen of the image display device 5 .

The layer configuration for the effect image is the same as that described in FIGS. 9-11, so the description is omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-16(4), at the timing when the first special suggestive effect should end (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 9-15), the effect control CPU 120 executes the first special suggestive effect. After that, the character A (large) 07TM100A is erased from the central portion of the screen of the image display device 5, and the A-mode special display change effect related to the A-mode first special suggestive effect is executed. The special display 07TM150 in the lower right part of the screen is changed to the A mode special display 07TM150A.

The layer configuration for the effect image is the same as that described in FIGS. 9-11, so the description is omitted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-16 (5A), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T5A shown in FIG. 9-15 (A)), the symbol confirmation designation command is received. The effect control CPU 120 ends the special display change effect, and changes the A mode special display 07TM150A in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 to the special display 07TM150.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation designation command, erases the active display 07TM003 from the active display area 07TM013, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, In the example, "212") is fixed and stopped. That is, the combination of small symbols that result in a display result of "loss" is determined and stopped.

<Example of production in case of (B)>
FIG. 9-15(B) is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the variation pattern is determined to be "no normal reach" in the case where the first special suggestive effect is executed. 16(1)-(4) and (5B) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images related to each of these effects.

The production configuration in FIGS. 9-16 (1) to (4) is the same as the production configuration in each production when the variation pattern is determined to be "non-reach out" in the case where the first special suggestive production is executed. Therefore, the description is omitted. Also, the execution timings (T1 to T4) of each effect in FIG. 9-15(B) are the same as the execution timings (T1 to T4) of each effect in FIG. 9-15(A), so the description is omitted. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-16 (5B), in a state where the reach state in the variation pattern is established, at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the first special symbol (in FIG. 9-15 (B) At the timing of T5B shown), the effect control CPU 120 that has received the pattern confirmation designation command ends the special display change effect, and changes the special display 07TM150A of the A mode in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5 to the special display 07TM150. .

At this time, the effect control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation designation command, erases the active display 07TM003 from the active display area 07TM013, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, In the example, "212") is fixed and stopped. That is, the combination of small symbols that result in a display result of "loss" is determined and stopped.

<Example of production in case of (C)>
FIG. 9-15(C) is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the variation pattern is determined to be "super reach A lost" in the case where the first special suggestive effect is executed. 9-16 (1) to (4) and (5C) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images related to each of these effects.

The production configuration in FIGS. 9-16 (1) to (4) is the same as the production configuration in each production when the variation pattern is determined to be "non-reach out" in the case where the first special suggestive production is executed. Therefore, the description is omitted. Also, the execution timings (T1 to T4) of each effect in FIG. 9-15 (C) are the same as the execution timings (T1 to T4) of each effect in FIG. 9-15 (A), so the description is omitted. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-16 (5C), in the state of developing to super reach in the variation pattern (in this example, the state in which the defeat effect is executed in the super reach A effect), the CPU 103 first At the timing of ending the variable display of the special symbol (at the timing of T5C shown in FIG. 9-15 (C)), the effect control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command ends the special display change effect, and the image display device 5, the A mode special display 07TM150A in the lower right portion of the screen is changed to special display 07TM150.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation designation command, erases the active display 07TM003 from the active display area 07TM013, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, In the example, "212") is fixed and stopped. That is, the combination of small symbols that result in a display result of "loss" is determined and stopped.

As described above, the execution timing of the first special suggestive effect in the first embodiment is a common timing (after the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol) regardless of the variation pattern. It is executed at the timing (timing T2 shown in FIGS. 9-13 (A) to (C)) after two seconds have passed.

[Execution timing when the first special suggestion effect is not executed at the time of reaching the relief time reduction]
The execution timing of each effect when the first special suggestive effect is not executed in the variable display at the time of reaching the relief time reduction will be described with reference to FIG. 9-17(A). FIG. 9-17(A) is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the first special suggestion effect is not executed in the variable display of relief time reduction arrival.

In this example, the power is turned off with the value of the relief time reduction number counter being 100, and the 100th fluctuation display is executed with the value of the relief time reduction number counter taken over without executing the RAM clear process when the power is restored. This is an example of the production when

At this time, it is decided not to execute the first special suggestion performance in the performance determination process at the time of fluctuation start, and the relief time reduction is reached at the 100th variation after the power is turned on (the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0). Based on this, it is decided to execute the countdown effect and the relief time-saving effect, and to execute the relief time-saving effect at normal timing.

In addition, in the first embodiment, in the variable display that reaches the relief time reduction, it is configured to execute the process of determining whether or not to execute the first special suggestive effect, but not limited to such a form, the relief time reduction is reached. Execution of the first special suggestive effect may be restricted by skipping the process of determining whether or not the first special suggestive effect is to be executed in the variable display.

Execution timings other than the timing (T3) to start the relief time reduction effect shown in FIG. 9-17 (A) are shown in FIG. time chart], the description is omitted.

At the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 9-17, that is, the timing at which the relief time-saving effect should be started (normal timing in this example), the effect control CPU 120 executes the preceding stage effect in the relief time-saving effect, and displays the image. The first arrival display 07TM350A (gray characters of "activate play time") is displayed in the center of the screen of the device 5. FIG. The first reaching display is an image having a higher display priority than the decoration pattern and the background image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, it seems to the player that the first arrival display, the decoration pattern and the background image are displayed in this order.

[Production example when the first special suggestion production is executed at the time of reaching the relief time reduction]
9-17(B), FIG. 9-18, and FIG. 9-19 will be used to explain the execution timing and an example of the effect when the first special suggestion effect is executed in the variable display at the time of reaching the relief time reduction. FIG. 9-17 (B) is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the first special suggestion effect is executed in the variable display of the relief time reduction arrival, and FIGS. 9-18 and 9-19 are It is an explanatory view showing an example of the effect image related to each of these effects.

In this example, the power is turned off with the value of the relief time reduction number counter being 100, and the 100th fluctuation display is executed with the value of the relief time reduction number counter taken over without executing the RAM clear process when the power is restored. This is an example of the production when In the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation at this time, it is decided to execute the first special suggestion effect of the 100th variation after power is turned on, and the relief time reduction is reached at the 100th variation after power is turned on (relief time reduction number counter value becomes 0), it is decided to execute the countdown effect and the relief time-saving effect, and to execute the first special suggestive effect at a special timing.

The effect configuration in FIG. 9-18 (1) is the same as the effect configuration when the CPU 103 shown in FIG. 9-11 (1) starts the variable display of the first special symbol, so the description is omitted.

Next, the effect configuration in FIG. 9-18 (2) is similar to the effect configuration when the countdown effect is executed in the variable display when the value of the relief time reduction counter shown in FIG. 9-12 (2) is 0. Therefore, the description is omitted.

9-18 (3) to (5), the first special suggestion effect of A mode and the special display change effect of A mode shown in FIGS. 9-11 (2A) to (4A) are executed. Description is omitted because it is the same as the effect configuration for when.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-18 (6), at the timing (timing of T6 shown in FIG. 9-17 (B), ie, special timing) to start the relief time reduction reaching production, the production control CPU 120, A front-stage effect in the relief time-saving reaching effect is executed, and the first reaching display 07TM350A (gray characters of "exercise play time") is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. - 特許庁The first reaching display is an image having a higher display priority than the decoration pattern and the background image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, it seems to the player that the first arrival display, the decoration pattern and the background image are displayed in this order.

Then, Figures 9-18 (7) and (8), and the production configuration in Figure 9-19 (9), the middle stage production and the latter stage in the relief time-saving arrival production shown in Figure 9-12 (4) ~ (6) Since it is the same as the production structure when the production is executed, the explanation is omitted.

In addition, in this example, the first special suggestion effect is executed at the time of reaching the rescue time reduction, so that the effect control CPU 120 is related to the first special suggestion effect of the A mode, as shown in FIG. A-mode special display change effect is executed, and the A-mode special display 07TM150A in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 is changed to the A-mode special display 07TM150AD (in this example, including the characters "Game MAX"). A white effect image is displayed around the special display, and the character A is displayed behind the special display).

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-19 (9), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 having received the symbol confirmation designation command terminates the special display change effect, The A mode special display 07TM150A in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 is changed from the A mode and arrival mode special display 07TM150AD to the arrival mode special display 07TM150D.

[Example of production at the end of play time]
In the first embodiment, when the game state is controlled from the time saving state B to the normal state, it is possible to execute a time saving ending effect suggesting that the time saving state B ends. In the time-saving ending effect, an end door image (in this example, an image simulating a black door) is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 .

In the first embodiment, the game state is controlled to the normal state, and during the period in which the time-saving ending effect is being executed (the period in which the end door image is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5), the second pending memory Variation display of the second special symbol based on (maximum four) is executed. Next, when the variable display of the second special symbols based on the second reserved storage for all the display results of "missing" is completed, and when the symbol confirmation designation command is received, the display on the entire screen of the image display device 5 ends. A door image is displayed as an animation in which the door opens from the front to the back. At this time, the effect that the end door image is displayed as an animation in which the door opens from the near side to the far side is performed during the pattern fixing period.

At this time, by animation of the end door image in the screen of the image display device 5, only in the region where the end door image is not displayed (hereinafter referred to as the second specific region), the decoration pattern of the image display device 5 is displayed. A first background image as a background image, a decorative pattern in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and a first reserve corresponding to the first reserve memory number if the first reserve memory number is 1 or more display and become visible.

Then, at the timing when the pattern fixing period ends, the time-saving ending effect is finished, the end door image is erased from the screen of the image display device 5, and the normal state as the background image of the decoration pattern of the image display device 5 is corresponded. The first background image, the decorative patterns in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and the first reserved display corresponding to the first reserved memory number if the first reserved memory number is 1 or more. becomes visible.

In addition, during the period when the game state is controlled to the normal state and the end door image is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the second reserved memory (maximum four) is executed. When the variable display of the second special pattern based on the second reserved memory is completed and the pattern confirmation designation command is received, the display result becomes a ``jackpot'' when the display result is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5.例文帳に追加An end door image is displayed as an animation in which the door opens from the front to the back. At this time, the effect that the end door image is displayed as an animation in which the door opens from the near side to the far side is performed during the pattern fixing period.

At this time, by animation of the end door image in the screen of the image display device 5, only in the region where the end door image is not displayed (hereinafter referred to as the second specific region), the central part of the screen of the image display device 5 A jackpot notification image (characters of "FEVER" in this example) for notifying that a jackpot will be won becomes visible.

Next, at the timing when the pattern fixing period ends, the time-saving ending performance is completed, the end door image is erased from the screen of the image display device 5, and a big hit is announced in the central part of the screen of the image display device 5.例文帳に追加The notification image (in this example, the characters "FEVER") becomes visible.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-5 and 9-6, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (YES in step 07TM70), the process of step S07TM75 is skipped. Therefore, it is not controlled to the time saving state B. Therefore, when the variable display is executed 1000 times without executing the variable display in which the display result is "big hit" in the time saving state B, when the time saving state B ends and is controlled to the normal state, usually Even if the variable display is performed 900 times without the variable display in which the display result is a "jackpot" in the state, the value of the relief time-saving number counter remains 0, so it is controlled to the time-saving state B. never That is, time saving state B does not loop.

Thus, in the first embodiment, since the time saving state B does not loop, when the normal state is controlled after the time saving state B ends, the special display is not displayed in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5. do.

An example of each effect at the end of play time (time saving state B) will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-20. FIGS. 9-20 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images related to each of these effects.

As shown in FIG. 9-20 (1), when the game state is controlled to the time saving state B and the value of the time saving number counter is 0, the CPU 103 displays the second special symbol variation (1000 in the play time The effect control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation designation command at the timing of ending the variable display of the first time, displays the final combination of decorative symbols (in this example, , "245") are fixed and stopped. At this time, the final combination of small symbols ("245" in this example) is determined and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c and 5r. That is, the combination of small symbols that result in a display result of "loss" is determined and stopped.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the fourth background image 07TM240 as the background image of the decoration pattern. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the characters "play time" in the upper left part of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the remaining time saving in the upper center part of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, "remaining 0 times”) is displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays a special display 07TM150D (in this example, characters of "GAME MAX") of the reaching mode on the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5. FIG.

At this time, since the first reserved memory number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays the character "0" in the first reserved memory number display area 07TM041 of the image display device 5, and displays the second reserved memory number. is 4, the character "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number display area 07TM042 of the image display device 5. FIG. At this time, four second pending displays are displayed in the second pending display area 07TM012 based on the fact that the second pending storage number is four.

As shown in FIG. 9-20 (2), the game state is controlled from the time saving state B to the normal state, and during the period in which the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 performs the time saving ending. An effect is executed, and the end door image 07TM365 is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. - 特許庁

(When all the display results of the second reserved memory are "missing")
Then, as shown in FIG. 9-20 (3A), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variation display of the second special symbol (variation display of the fourth second reserved memory), the effect of receiving the symbol confirmation designation command The control CPU 120 determines and stops the final combination of small symbols ("314" in this example) in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. That is, the combination of small symbols that result in a display result of "loss" is determined and stopped.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 does not display the special display 07TM150 on the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 although the game state is controlled to the normal state.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the end door image 07TM365 that has been displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 as an animation in which the door opens from the front to the back. At this time, only in the second specific region 07TM365E, the first background image 07TM210 corresponding to the normal state as the background image of the decorative pattern of the image display device 5 and the background image 07TM210 immediately before the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 are displayed. A combination of decorative symbols ("314" in this example) that results in a display result executed in the first step being "missing" can be visually recognized.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-20 (4A), at the timing when the pattern fixing period ends, the effect control CPU 120 ends the time-saving ending effect, and erases the end door image 07TM365 from the screen of the image display device 5. do. At this time, the combination of the first background image 07TM210 corresponding to the normal state as the background image of the decoration pattern of the image display device 5 and the decoration pattern executed immediately before in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 ("314" in this example) becomes visible.

(If any of the display results in the second reserved memory is a "jackpot")
Next, as shown in FIG. 9-20 (3B), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variation display of the second special symbol (the variation display of the fourth second reserved memory) where the display result is "jackpot" , the effect control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command determines and stops the final combination of small symbols ("777" in this example) in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. In other words, the combination of small symbols whose display result is "777" is determined and stopped.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 does not display the special display 07TM150 on the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 although the game state is controlled to the normal state.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the end door image 07TM365 that has been displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 as an animation in which the door opens from the front to the back. At this time, the jackpot notification image 07TM367 (characters of "FEVER" in this example) for notifying that the jackpot will be won in the central part of the screen of the image display device 5 can be visually recognized only in the second specific area 07TM365E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-20 (4B), at the timing when the symbol fixing period ends, the effect control CPU 120 ends the time-saving ending effect, and erases the end door image 07TM365 from the screen of the image display device 5. do. At this time, a jackpot notification image 07TM367 (characters of "FEVER" in this example) for notifying that a jackpot will be won in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 becomes visible.

[Modified example when the first special suggestive effect is executed]
In the above-described first embodiment, regardless of which variation pattern the variation pattern is, the common timing (timing two seconds after the CPU 103 starts the variation display of the first special symbol (FIG. 9-15 (A ) to T2 shown in (C))), the first special suggestive effect is executed, but not limited to such a form, at different timings depending on which variation pattern the variation pattern is , the first special suggestion effect may be executed.

For example, (A) when the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach out" and (B) when the fluctuation pattern is "normal reach out", common timing (employed in the first embodiment [CPU 103 At the timing (timing T2 shown in FIGS. 9-15 (A) and (B))]) after two seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special suggestive effect is executed (C). When the variation pattern is "missing super reach A", the first special suggestion effect may be executed at a timing different from the cases of (A) and (B).

In this modification, (C) when the variation pattern is "Super reach A lost", the first special suggestion effect is performed at a predetermined timing after the defeat effect in which the display result is notified in the super reach A effect is executed. shall be carried out.

9-21 and 9-22, the execution timing when the first special suggestive effect is executed and a modified example of the effect when the variation pattern is "super reach A lost" will be described. In this modified example, of the cases where the first special suggestive effect is executed, (C) the case where the variation pattern is "super reach A lost" will be described.

<Example of production in case of (C)>
FIG. 9-21(C) is a modified example of a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the variation pattern is determined to be "missing super reach A" in the case where the first special suggestive effect is executed. 9-22 are explanatory diagrams showing modified examples of effect images related to each of these effects.

It should be noted that the effect images (active display, pending display, special display, decorative pattern, small pattern, third 1 reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, etc.) is the same as the effect configuration in the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 9-16, so the description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 9-22 (1), the effect control CPU 120 executes the defeat effect at the timing when the display result in the variation pattern should be notified (at the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 9-21 (C)). , to notify that the display result is "mismatch". In the defeat effect, the image display device 5 is displayed with the character 07TM390A defeated by the enemy character 07TM390B, and the character "defeat" is displayed in the central part of the image display device 5, and the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. First, the combination of decorative symbols (“212” in this example) suggesting that the display result is “miss” is stopped from swinging. At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to variably display the small patterns.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-22 (2), at a predetermined timing after the execution of the defeat effect that informs that the display result is "loss" (T6 shown in FIG. 9-21 (C) At the timing), the effect control CPU 120 executes the first special suggestion effect of the A mode, and causes the character A (small) 07TM100a to be displayed on the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 .

The character A (small) 07TM100a is an image having a higher display priority than the effect image related to the decoration pattern and the defeat effect (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in front). Therefore, it seems to the player that the character A (small) 07TM100a, the decoration pattern, and the effect image related to the defeat effect are displayed in this order from the front to the back.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-22 (3), at the timing 1.5 seconds after starting the first special suggestive effect (at the timing of T7 shown in FIG. 9-21 (C)), effect control The game CPU 120 continues to execute the first special suggestion effect of the A mode, and causes the character A (large) 07TM100A to be displayed in the central portion of the screen of the image display device 5 .

The character A (large) 07TM100A is an image having a higher display priority than the decorative symbols and the effect image relating to the defeat effect (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in front). Therefore, from the player's point of view, it appears that the character A (large) 07TM100A, the decoration pattern, and the effect image related to the defeat effect are displayed in this order from the front to the back.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-22(4), at the timing to end the first special suggestive effect (at the timing of T8 shown in FIG. 9-21(C)), the effect control CPU 120 The suggestive effect is ended, the character A (large) 07TM100A is erased from the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the A-mode special display change effect related to the A-mode first special suggestive effect is executed, and the image is displayed. The special display 07TM150 in the lower right portion of the screen of the device 5 is changed to the A mode special display 07TM150A.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-22 (5), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T9 shown in FIG. 9-21 (C)), it receives the symbol confirmation designation command. The effect control CPU 120 ends the special display change effect, and changes the A mode special display 07TM150A in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 to the special display 07TM150. At this time, the effect control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation designation command, erases the active display 07TM003 from the active display area 07TM013, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, In the example, "212") is fixed and stopped. That is, the combination of small symbols that result in a display result of "loss" is determined and stopped.

[Second embodiment]
In the second embodiment, when an eye-catching effect (see FIG. 9-23) is executed when a later-described effect stage shifts to a different effect stage, RAM clear processing is executed when the game machine is powered on. A second special suggestive effect (see FIG. 9-24), which will be described later, can be executed as a special suggestive effect suggesting that it is not.

[Production stage]
Each production stage (sunny stage, cloudy stage, rainy stage) in the second embodiment will be described in detail. In the second embodiment, there are a plurality of production stages with different background images of decorative designs. In the second embodiment, there are a "sunny stage", a "cloudy stage", and a "rainy stage" as production stages.

In the second embodiment, when the production stage is the sunny stage, the "first background image 07TM210" representing the sunny scenery including the sun and the mountains is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. When the stage is the cloudy stage, the "second background image 07TM220" representing a cloudy landscape including clouds is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and when the production stage is the rainy stage, the background of the decorative pattern is displayed. It is assumed that a “third background image 07TM230” representing a rainy landscape including clouds and rain is displayed as an image.

In the second embodiment, it is assumed that the production stage shifts to the next production stage each time the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times. The shift from this production stage to the next production stage is called a stage change or a stage change. In this example, it is assumed that the effect stage shifts to the next effect stage each time the variable display is performed 25 times. Also, in this example, the order of transition of the production stage is "sunny stage"→"cloudy stage"→"rainy stage"→"sunny stage". Therefore, after shifting to the "sunny stage" and executing the variable display 25 times, the shift to the "cloudy stage" is executed, and after shifting to the "cloudy stage" and executing the variable display 25 times, the "rainy stage" is executed. , and after shifting to the "rainy stage" and executing the variable display 25 times, it shifts to the "sunny stage".

[Eye-catching effect]
In the second embodiment, an eye-catching effect can be executed when the presently controlled effect stage is shifted to the next effect stage. This eye-catching effect is performed at the timing immediately before the end of the variable display when the 25th variable display is being executed in the currently controlled effect stage (for example, at the timing two seconds before the end of the variable display). By displaying the eye-catching image 07TM400 on the entire screen of the image display device 5, the visibility of the background image of the decoration pattern corresponding to the presently controlled production stage is temporarily lowered, and then the next production stage is supported. It is a kind of production that displays a background image with a decorative design.

The eye-catching image in the second embodiment is not related to the display results such as the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (characters "FEVER ZZZ" in this example) and the model character (character Z in this example). Information is included, and information that causes misunderstanding that it is a foretelling effect that foretells whether or not a big hit will be controlled is not included.

[Example of production stage and eye-catching production]
An example of an effect when an eye-catching effect is executed when various effect stages are changed will be described with reference to FIG. 9-23. FIG. 9-23 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to each of these effects.

9-23 (active display, reserved display, special display, decoration pattern, small pattern, first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, etc.). Since it is the same as the rendering configuration in the embodiment, the description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 9-23(1), when the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect stage to the sunny stage, the first background image 07TM210 is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern.

Next, it is assumed that the 25th variable display has been performed since the effect stage was controlled to the sunny stage.

As shown in FIG. 9-23 (2), the effect control CPU 120 executes the eye-catching effect at the timing when the eye-catching effect should be executed, and displays the eye-catching image 07TM400 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23(3), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect stage to the cloudy stage, and displays the second background image 07TM220 as the background image of the decoration pattern.

Next, it is assumed that the 25th variable display has been performed since the effect stage was controlled to the cloudy stage.

As shown in FIG. 9-23(4), at the timing when the eye-catching effect should be executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the eye-catching effect and displays the eye-catching image 07TM400 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23(5), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect stage to the rain stage, and displays the third background image 07TM230 as the background image of the decoration pattern.

Next, it is assumed that the 25th variable display has been performed since the production stage was controlled to the rain stage.

As shown in FIG. 9-23 (6), at the timing when the eye-catching effect should be executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the eye-catching effect and displays the eye-catching image 07TM400 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23(7), when the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect stage to the sunny stage, the first background image 07TM210 is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern.

[Second Special Suggestion Effect]
In the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is (A) when the 100th fluctuation display is executed after being controlled to the low probability state after power-on, or (B) Control to the low probability state after the big hit When the 100th variable display is executed after the display is performed, the second special suggestive effect can be executed as the special suggestive effect while the eye-catching effect is being executed. This second special suggestion effect is determined based on the determination at the start of the fluctuation (effect determination process at the start of the fluctuation) and the effect mode is determined, and whether or not the RAM clear process is executed when the power is restored, and the time until the relief time reduction is reached. It is a kind of production that suggests the number of fluctuations.

In the second special suggestive effect, characters (character A, character B, and character C) suggesting execution/non-execution of RAM clear processing at the time of power restoration and the number of times of fluctuation until relief time reduction are superimposed on the eye-catching image. . It is assumed that the characters (characters A to C) used in this second special suggestive effect are different from the character included in the eye-catching image (character Z in this example). The characters (characters A to C) are images having a higher display priority than the eye-catching image (they are displayed in a higher layer and appear to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, it appears to the player that the characters (characters A to C) and the eye-catching image are displayed in this order from the front to the back.

In the second embodiment, there are a plurality of rendering modes in which the characters displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 are different as the rendering mode of the second special suggestive rendering. There are "mode A", "mode B", and "mode C" as rendering modes of the second special suggestive rendering.

In the second special suggestive effect of A mode, character A (character A (small) 07TM100a) including a white effect image is displayed.

In the second special suggestion effect of B mode, character B (character B (small) 07TM100b) including a blue effect image is displayed.

In the first special suggestion effect of the C mode, the character C (character C (small) 07TM100c) including the red effect image is displayed.

[Production example of the second special suggestive production]
An example of an effect when the second special suggestion effect is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 9-24. FIG. 9-24 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to each of these effects.

In this example, FIG. 9-24 (2) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect image when the eye-catching effect is executed but the second special suggestion effect is not executed, and FIG. 9-24 (2A). 9-24(2B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect image when the eye-catching effect is executed and the second special suggestive effect of the A mode is executed, and FIG. 9-24(2C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect image when executing the second special suggestive effect of mode B, and FIG. is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image when executing .

The production configuration shown in FIG. 9-24(1) is the same as the production configuration shown in FIG. 9-23(1) when the production stage is the sunny stage, so the description is omitted.

9-24 (active display, reserved display, special display, decorative pattern, small pattern, first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, etc.). Since it is the same as the rendering configuration in the embodiment, the description is omitted.

(When the second special suggestive effect is not executed)
Next, as shown in FIG. 9-24(2), at the timing when the eye-catching effect should be executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the eye-catching effect and displays the eye-catching image 07TM400 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. display.

(When the second special suggestion effect of A mode is executed)
As shown in FIG. 9-24 (2A), at the timing when the eye-catching effect should be executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the eye-catching effect and causes the entire screen of the image display device 5 to display the eye-catching image 07TM400. At the same time, the second special suggestion effect of the A mode is executed, and the character A (small) 07TM100a is displayed superimposed on the lower left part of the eye-catching image 07TM400 on the image display device 5 .

The character A (small) 07TM100a is an image having a higher display priority than the eye-catching image 07TM400 (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in front). Therefore, it appears to the player that the character A (small) 07TM100a and the eye-catching image 07TM400 are displayed in this order from the front to the back.

(When the second special suggestive effect of mode B is executed)
As shown in FIG. 9-24 (2B), at the timing when the eye-catching effect should be executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the eye-catching effect and causes the entire screen of the image display device 5 to display the eye-catching image 07TM400. At the same time, the second special suggestion effect of the B mode is executed, and the character B (small) 07TM100b is displayed superimposed on the lower left part of the eye-catching image 07TM400 on the image display device 5 .

The character B (small) 07TM100b is an image having a higher display priority than the eye-catching image 07TM400 (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in front). Therefore, it seems to the player that the character B (small) 07TM100b and the eye-catching image 07TM400 are displayed in this order from the front to the back.

(When the second special suggestion effect of C mode is executed)
As shown in FIG. 9-24 (2C), at the timing when the eye-catching effect should be executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the eye-catching effect and displays the eye-catching image 07TM400 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. At the same time, the second special suggestion effect of the C mode is executed, and the character C (small) 07TM100c is superimposed and displayed on the lower left part of the eye-catching image 07TM400 on the image display device 5 .

The character C (small) 07TM100c is an image having a higher display priority than the eye-catching image 07TM400 (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in front). Therefore, it seems to the player that the character C (small) 07TM100c and the eye-catching image 07TM400 are displayed in this order from the front to the back.

<[For 100th change after power-on] Execution/non-execution of second special suggestion effect and effect mode determination table>
As shown in FIG. 9-25(A), [for the 100th change after turning on the power] execution/non-execution of the second special suggestion effect and effect mode determination table, execution/non-execution of the RAM clear processing specified by the initialization command and the value of the relief time-saving number counter designated by the relief time-saving number-of-times designation command, a determination value for determining whether or not to execute the second special suggestion performance and the performance mode is assigned.

When the execution/non-execution of the RAM clearing process is "no execution", the production control CPU 120 performs B mode (blue effect image , and decides to execute the second special suggestive effect of C mode (character C with red effect image) at a rate of 60%. .

The effect control CPU 120 performs the second special suggestion effect at a rate of 10% when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "200 to 399" in the case where the RAM clear process is executed or not is "not executed". Decided not to execute, decided to execute the second special suggestive effect of mode A (character A with white effect image) at a rate of 5%, mode B (with a blue effect image) at a rate of 70% It is decided to execute the second special suggestive effect of the accompanying character B), and to execute the second special suggestive effect of the C mode (character C accompanied by the red effect image) at a rate of 15%.

The effect control CPU 120 performs the second special suggestion effect at a rate of 20% when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "400 to 699" in the case where the RAM clear process is executed or not is "not executed". Decided not to execute, decided to execute the second special suggestive effect of mode A (character A with white effect image) at a rate of 30%, mode B (with a blue effect image) at a rate of 50% It is decided to execute the second special suggestive effect of the accompanying character B).

The effect control CPU 120 performs the second special suggestion effect at a rate of 30% when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "700 to 800" in the case where the RAM clear process is executed or not is "not executed". Decided not to execute, decided to execute the second special suggestive effect of mode A (character A with white effect image) at a rate of 30%, mode B (with a blue effect image) at a rate of 30% It is decided to execute the second special suggestive effect of the accompanying character B).

The performance control CPU 120 executes the second special suggestive performance at a rate of 40% when the execution status of the RAM clearing process is "executed" (when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "800"). Decided not to execute the second special suggestive effect of mode A (character A with a white effect image) at a rate of 50%, and mode B (with a blue effect image) at a rate of 10%. It is decided to execute the second special suggestion effect of the character B).

<[For the 100th change after the big hit] Execution/non-execution of the second special suggestion effect and effect mode determination table>
As shown in FIG. 9-25 (B), [for the 100th variation after the big hit] execution presence/absence of the second special suggestion effect and effect mode determination table, execution/non-execution of the RAM clearing process specified by the initialization command A determination value for determining whether or not the second special suggestive effect is executed and the effect mode is assigned according to the value of the remedy time-saving number counter specified by the remedy time-saving number specifying command.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the second special suggestive performance at a rate of 70% when the RAM clearing process execution status is "no execution" (when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "800"). Decided not to execute the second special suggestive effect of mode A (character B with a white effect image) at a rate of 5%, and mode B (with a blue effect image) at a rate of 10% It decides to execute the second special suggestive effect of character B), and decides to execute the second special suggestive effect of C mode (character C with red effect image) at a rate of 5%.

Effect control CPU 120 executes the second special suggestive effect at a rate of 80% when the execution status of the RAM clearing process is "executed" (when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "800"). Decided not to, decided to execute the second special suggestive effect of mode A (character B with a white effect image) at a rate of 15%, and mode B (with a blue effect image) at a rate of 5% It is decided to execute the second special suggestion effect of the character B).

[Third Embodiment]
In the third embodiment, when a periodical light emitting effect (see FIG. 9-26), which will be described later, is executed, a special suggestive effect that suggests that the RAM clearing process has not been executed when the game machine is powered on is provided. It is possible to execute a third special suggestion effect (see FIG. 9-27).

[Periodical light effect]
In the third embodiment, (A) when the 100 × Nth (N is an integer of 1 or more) fluctuation display is executed after being controlled to a low-probability state after power-on, or (B) low-probability after a big hit When the 100×N-th variable display is executed after being controlled to the state, the main lamp 9a provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3 is caused to emit white light. It is possible. This periodic lighting effect can be executed at the start of fluctuation in (A) or (B), and is a kind of effect suggesting the number of fluctuations.

An example of effect when periodic light emission effect is executed after power-on will be described with reference to FIG. 9-26. FIG. 9-26 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a time chart showing execution timings related to these effects and an effect image.

In this example, an effect example is shown when the periodic light emission effect is executed in the 100th, 200th, and 300th variable displays after being controlled to the low-probability state after the power is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 9-26, at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (the 100th variable display after being controlled to the low probability state after the power is turned on), the effect control CPU 120 has a period A light emission effect is executed to cause the main lamp 9a to emit white light.

Next, at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (the 200th variable display after being controlled to the low probability state after the power is turned on), the effect control CPU 120 executes the periodic light emission effect, and the main The lamp 9a is caused to emit white light.

Next, at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (the 300th variable display after being controlled to the low probability state after the power is turned on), the effect control CPU 120 executes the periodic light emission effect, and the main The lamp 9a is caused to emit white light.

[Third Special Suggestion Effect]
In the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is (A) when the 100th fluctuation display is executed after being controlled to the low probability state after power is turned on, or (B) It is controlled to the low probability state after the big hit. When the 100th variable display is executed since then, the third special suggestive effect can be executed as the special suggestive effect at the timing when the periodic light emission effect should be executed. This third special suggestion effect is determined based on the determination at the start of the fluctuation (effect determination process at the start of the fluctuation) and the effect mode is determined, and whether or not the RAM clear process is executed when the power is restored, and the time until the relief time reduction is reached It is a kind of production that suggests the number of fluctuations. In the third special suggestive effect, the main lamp 9a provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3 is illuminated.

In the third embodiment, there are a plurality of rendering modes in which the main lamp 9a emits light of different colors as the rendering mode of the third special suggestive rendering. As the rendering mode of the third special suggestive rendering, there are "light emitting color: blue", "light emitting color: green", and "light emitting color: red".

Emission color: In the third special suggestive effect of blue, the main lamp 9a provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3 emits blue light. In the following description, the third special suggestive effect of luminescent color: blue may be referred to as the third special suggestive effect [blue].

Emission color: In the green third special suggestive effect, the main lamp 9a provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3 emits green light. In the following description, the third special suggestive effect of luminescent color: green may be referred to as the third special suggestive effect [green].

Emission color: In the third special suggestive effect of red, the main lamp 9a provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3 emits red light. In the following description, the third special suggestive effect of luminescent color: red may be referred to as the third special suggestive effect [red].

In addition, in the third embodiment, (A) when the 100th variation display is executed after being controlled to a low probability state after power on, or (B) 100 times after being controlled to a low probability state after a big hit Although the third special suggestive effect can be executed when the variable display is executed for the first time, it is not limited to such a form, but at other timings. A third special suggestion effect may be executed.

For example, in the third embodiment, the 100 × Nth (N is an integer of 1 or more) fluctuation display after being controlled to a low-probability state after (A) power-on at the timing when the periodic light-emitting effect should be executed. (B) When the 100×N-th variation display is executed after being controlled to the low-probability state after the big hit), the third special suggestion effect may be executed.

[Production example of the third special suggestive production]
An example of an effect when the third special suggestion effect is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 9-27. FIG. 9-27 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a time chart showing execution timings related to these effects and an effect image.

In this example, an effect example when the periodic light emitting effect is executed without executing the third special suggestion effect in the 100th fluctuation display after being controlled to the low probability state after power on, and a low probability state after power on and an effect example when the third special suggestive effect is executed in the 100th variable display after being controlled to , and the periodic light emitting effect is not executed.

(When the third special suggestion effect is not executed)
As shown in FIG. 9-27, at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (the 100th variable display after being controlled to the low probability state after the power is turned on), the effect control CPU 120 has a period A light emission effect is executed to cause the main lamp 9a to emit white light.

(When the third special suggestion effect [blue] is executed)
As shown in FIG. 9-27, at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (the 100th variable display after being controlled to the low probability state after the power is turned on), the effect control CPU 120 3 Special suggestion effect [blue] is executed, and the main lamp 9a is caused to emit blue light.

(When the third special suggestion effect [green] is executed)
As shown in FIG. 9-27, at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (the 100th variable display after being controlled to the low probability state after the power is turned on), the effect control CPU 120 3 Special suggestion effect [green] is executed, and the main lamp 9a is caused to emit green light.

(When the third special suggestion effect [red] is executed)
As shown in FIG. 9-27, at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (the 100th variable display after being controlled to the low probability state after the power is turned on), the effect control CPU 120 3 Special suggestive effect [red] is executed to cause the main lamp 9a to emit red light.

<[For the 100th change after turning on the power] Execution/non-execution of the third special suggestion effect and effect mode determination table>
As shown in FIG. 9-28(A), [For the 100th change after turning on the power] Execution/non-execution of the third special suggestion effect and effect mode determination table, execution/non-execution of the RAM clear processing specified by the initialization command and the value of the relief time-saving number counter designated by the relief time-saving number-of-times designation command, a determination value for determining whether or not to execute the third special suggestion performance and the performance mode is assigned.

The effect control CPU 120 performs the third special suggestion effect at a rate of 40% [ green], and decides to perform the third special suggestive effect [red] at a rate of 60%.

The performance control CPU 120 performs the third special suggestion performance at a rate of 10% when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "200 to 399" in the case where the RAM clearing process is executed or not is "not executed". Decided not to execute (that is, to execute the periodic light emitting effect), decided to execute the third special suggestive effect [blue] at a rate of 5%, and decided to execute the third special suggestive effect [green] at a rate of 70% ], and decides to execute the third special suggestive effect [red] at a rate of 15%.

The effect control CPU 120 performs the third special suggestion effect at a rate of 20% when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "400 to 699" in the case where the execution presence or absence of the RAM clearing process is "no execution". Decided not to execute (that is, execute the periodic light emission effect), decided to execute the third special suggestive effect [blue] at a rate of 30%, and decided to execute the third special suggestive effect [green] at a rate of 50% ].

The effect control CPU 120 performs the third special suggestion effect at a rate of 30% when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "700 to 800" in the case where the RAM clear process is executed or not is "not executed". Decided not to execute (that is, execute the periodic light emission effect), decided to execute the third special suggestive effect [blue] at a rate of 40%, and decided to execute the third special suggestive effect [green] at a rate of 30% ].

Effect control CPU 120 executes the third special suggesting effect at a rate of 40% when the execution status of the RAM clearing process is "executed" (when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "800"). Decided not to (that is, to execute the periodic lighting effect), decided to execute the third special suggestive effect [blue] at a rate of 50%, and decided to execute the third special suggestive effect [green] at a rate of 10%. decide to carry out

<[For the 100th variation after the big hit] Execution/non-execution of the third special suggestion effect and effect mode determination table>
As shown in FIG. 9-28(B), [for the 100th variation after the big hit] execution presence/absence of the third special suggestion effect and effect mode determination table, execution/non-execution of the RAM clearing process specified by the initialization command A determination value for determining whether or not to execute the third special suggestive effect and the effect mode is assigned according to the value of the remedy time-saving number counter specified by the remedy time-saving number specifying command.

Effect control CPU 120 executes the third special suggestion effect at a rate of 70% when the execution/non-execution of the RAM clearing process is "not executed" (when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "800"). Decided not to (that is, to execute the periodic lighting effect), decided to execute the third special suggestive effect [blue] at a rate of 5%, and decided to execute the third special suggestive effect [green] at a rate of 10%. and decides to execute the third special suggestive effect [red] at a rate of 15%.

Effect control CPU 120 executes the third special suggestive effect at a rate of 80% when the RAM clearing process is executed or not (when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 800). Decided to not (that is, to execute the periodic lighting effect), decided to execute the third special suggestive effect [blue] at a rate of 15%, and decided to execute the third special suggestive effect [green] at a rate of 5%. decide to carry out

In addition, in the third special suggestion effect, (A) when the 100 × Nth (N is an integer of 1 or more) fluctuation display is executed after being controlled to a low probability state after turning on the power, or (B) after a big hit When the 100×N-th variable display is executed after being controlled to the low-probability state (that is, at the timing when the periodic light-emitting effect should be executed), the process of determining whether or not to execute the third special suggestive effect is executed. However, a configuration capable of executing the second special suggestion effect may be adopted. Therefore, the process of determining whether or not to execute the third special suggestive effect is executed every 100 fluctuations, and the third special suggestive effect can be executed.

[Fourth embodiment]
In the fourth embodiment, when the first variable display after the power is turned on is executed, a special suggestion effect indicating that the RAM clearing process has not been executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on is performed. A special suggestive effect (see FIG. 9-29) can be executed.

[Fourth special suggestion production]
In the fourth embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to a low probability state at the time of power-on, over a predetermined period from the time when the first fluctuation display after power-on is executed, as a special suggestion effect A fourth special suggestion effect can be executed. This fourth special suggestion effect is determined based on the determination at the start of the fluctuation (production determination process at the start of the fluctuation) and the effect mode is determined, and whether or not the RAM clear process is executed when the power is restored, and the time until the relief time reduction is reached. It is a kind of production that suggests the number of fluctuations.

In the fourth embodiment, the production stage in the normal state is the sunny stage, and the "first background image 07TM210" showing the sunny scenery including the sun and the mountains is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern. In the fourth special suggestive presentation, the presentation stage in the normal state becomes the volcano stage for a predetermined period from the time when the first variable display is performed after the power is turned on, and the scenery of the volcano including the volcano is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern. "Fifth Background Image 07TM250" is displayed.

In the fourth embodiment, there are a plurality of rendering modes with different execution periods as rendering modes of the fourth special suggestive rendering. There are "execution period: 10 variations", "execution period: 20 variations", and "execution period: 25 variations" as the effect mode of the fourth special suggestion effect.

Execution period: In the 4th special suggestive effect of 10 variations, the effect stage becomes the volcano stage and the background image of the decorative pattern is over the period from when the first variable display starts after the power is turned on to when the tenth variable display ends. , the fifth background image 07TM250 is displayed. Hereinafter, the fourth special suggestive effect with execution period: 10 variations may be referred to as the fourth special suggestive effect [10 variations].

Execution period: In the 4th special suggestion effect of 20 variations, the effect stage becomes the volcano stage and the background image of the decoration pattern is over the period from the time when the first variation display starts after the power is turned on to the end of the 20th variation display. , the fifth background image 07TM250 is displayed. Hereinafter, the fourth special suggestive effect with execution period: 20 variations may be referred to as the fourth special suggestive effect [20 variations].

Execution period: In the 4th special suggestion effect of 25 fluctuations, the production stage becomes the volcano stage and the background image of the decoration pattern is over the period from the time when the first fluctuation display starts after the power is turned on to the end of the 25th fluctuation display. , the fifth background image 07TM250 is displayed. In the following, the fourth special suggestive effect with execution period: 25 variations may be referred to as the fourth special suggestive effect [25 variations].

[Production example of the fourth special suggestive production]
An example of an effect when the fourth special suggestion effect is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-29. FIGS. 9-29 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images related to each of these effects.

In the fourth embodiment, when the production control CPU 120 receives a customer waiting demonstration display designation command designating the customer waiting state, a customer waiting demonstration production in which a demonstration image 07TM500 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. (See Figure 9-29 (1)).

In this example, when the power is turned on, it is controlled to the normal state, the first variable display is not executed after the power is turned on, and the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed. is executed for the first time.

In this example, an example of an effect when the fourth special suggestive effect is not executed in the first variable display after the power is turned on, and an effect when the fourth special suggestive effect is executed in the first variable display after the power is turned on. Examples and .

As shown in FIG. 9-29 (1), the effect control CPU 120 executes the customer waiting demo effect and causes the image display device 5 to display the demo image 07TM500 on the entire screen. At this time, the demo image 07TM500 includes a teammate character, the characters "demonstration video", and an announcement image (in this example, an image in which the characters "equipped with playtime" are displayed on a triangular object). there is

(When the 4th special suggestive effect is not executed)
Then, as shown in FIG. 9-29 (2A), a new start winning occurs, and at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (the first variable display after turning on the power), the production The control CPU 120 terminates the customer waiting demonstration effect, erases the demonstration image 07TM500 from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and displays the first background image 07TM210 as the background image of the decoration pattern.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of decorative patterns in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, The variable display of the small pattern is started. At this time, the active display area 07TM013 displays the normal mode active display 07TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed.

At this time, since the first reserved memory number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays the character "0" in the first reserved memory number display area 07TM041 of the image display device 5, and displays the second reserved memory number. is 0, the character "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number display area 07TM042 of the image display device 5. FIG. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays a special display 07TM150 (in this example, the characters "game 001") on the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5. FIG.

(When the 4th special suggestion effect is executed)
Then, as shown in FIG. 9-29 (2B), a new start winning occurs, and at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (the first variable display after the power is turned on), the production The control CPU 120 ends the customer waiting demonstration effect, erases the demonstration image 07TM500 from the entire screen of the image display device 5, executes the fourth special suggestion effect, and displays the fifth background image 07TM250 as the background image of the decoration pattern. display.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of decorative patterns in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, The variable display of the small pattern is started. At this time, the active display area 07TM013 displays the normal mode active display 07TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed.

At this time, since the first reserved memory number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays the character "0" in the first reserved memory number display area 07TM041 of the image display device 5, and displays the second reserved memory number. is 0, the character "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number display area 07TM042 of the image display device 5. FIG. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays a special display 07TM150 (in this example, the characters "game 001") on the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5. FIG.

<[For the first change after turning on the power] Execution/non-execution of the fourth special suggestion effect and effect mode determination table>
As shown in FIG. 9-30, in the [for the first fluctuation after power-on] execution presence/absence of the fourth special suggestive effect and effect mode determination table, whether or not the RAM clear processing specified by the initialization command is executed, and whether the relief A determination value for determining whether or not to execute the fourth special suggesting effect and the effect mode is assigned according to the value of the remedy time saving counter specified by the time saving frequency specifying command.

The effect control CPU 120 performs the fourth special suggestion effect [ 20 variations], and decides to perform the fourth special suggestive effect [25 variations] at a rate of 60%.

The effect control CPU 120 performs the fourth special suggestion effect at a rate of 10% when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "200 to 399" in the case where the RAM clear process is executed or not is "not executed". Decided not to execute (that is, control to the sunny stage), decided to execute the fourth special suggestive effect [10 variations] at a rate of 5%, and decided to execute the fourth special suggestive effect [20 changes] at a rate of 70%. variation], and decides to perform the fourth special suggestive effect [25 variation] at a rate of 15%.

The effect control CPU 120 performs the fourth special suggestion effect at a rate of 20% when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "400 to 699" in the case where the RAM clear process is executed or not is "not executed". Decided not to execute (that is, control to the sunny stage), decided to execute the fourth special suggestive effect [10 variations] at a rate of 30%, and decided to execute the fourth special suggestive effect [20 changes] at a rate of 50%. change].

The effect control CPU 120 performs the fourth special suggestive effect at a rate of 30% when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "700 to 800" in the case where the RAM clearing process is executed or not is "not executed". Decided not to execute (that is, control to the sunny stage), decided to execute the fourth special suggestive effect [10 variations] at a rate of 40%, and decided to execute the fourth special suggestive effect [20 changes] at a rate of 30%. change].

Effect control CPU 120 executes the fourth special suggestion effect at a rate of 100% when the RAM clearing process is executed or not (when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 800). It is decided not to (that is, control to the sunny stage).

It should be noted that even when the execution/non-execution of the RAM clearing process is "executed", it may be determined to execute the fourth special suggestive effect. Further, when the execution/non-execution of the RAM clearing process is "executed", the execution ratio of the fourth special suggestive effect of each effect mode may be varied according to the value of the relief time reduction number counter.

[Fifth embodiment]
In the fifth embodiment, (A) when the 100th variation display is executed after being controlled to the low probability state after power on, or (B) the 100th variation after being controlled to the low probability state after the big hit When the display is executed, when the ready-to-reach state in the variation pattern is established, at the timing when the normal dialogue announcement effect (see FIGS. 9-31 (2A) to (2C)) to be described later should be executed, the game A fifth special suggestion effect (see FIG. 9-31 (2D)), which will be described later, can be executed as a special suggestion effect suggesting that the RAM clearing process has not been executed when the machine is powered on.

[Normal dialogue announcement]
In the fifth embodiment, when the variation pattern is a variation pattern with reach (that is, when the variation pattern is "normal reach lost", "normal reach big hit", "super reach A lost", "super reach A big hit", " In the case of either variation pattern of "super reach B miss" or "super reach B big hit"), at a predetermined timing after the reach state in the variation pattern is established (in this example, 1 second after the reach is established) At the timing), it is possible to execute a normal dialogue announcement production that suggests (advance) the degree of expectation of a big hit. In this normal dialogue announcement effect, the character D and the normal dialogue display among the dialogue displays are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. - 特許庁

The dialogue display is a balloon-shaped image containing character information corresponding to the contents of what the character D has said. In the normal dialogue display among the dialogue displays, it is assumed that character information corresponding to the contents suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit is included as the contents spoken by the character D.

In the fifth embodiment, there are a plurality of presentation modes in which the character information of the dialog display is different as the presentation mode of the normal dialog preview presentation. There are a "chance mode", a "hot heat mode", and a "Fever mode" as the performance mode of the normal dialogue forewarning performance.

In the chance-mode normal dialogue announcement performance, the character D and the normal dialogue display (in this example, the characters "Chance?" suggesting that the expectation of a big hit is low) are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, is displayed. Hereinafter, the normal dialogue foretelling effect in the chance mode may be referred to as normal dialogue foretelling effect [chance].

In the superheat mode normal speech announcement effect, the character D and the normal speech are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, the characters "Super heat!!" suggesting that the expectation of a big hit is high). and is displayed. In the following description, the intense heat mode normal dialogue preview effect may be referred to as normal dialogue preview effect [extreme heat].

In the FEVER mode normal dialogue announcement effect, a character D and a normal dialogue display (in this example, "FEVER!!" indicating that a big win is confirmed are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5). characters) and are displayed. Hereinafter, the FEVER mode normal dialogue forewarning effect may be referred to as normal dialogue forewarning effect [FEVER].

[Fifth Special Suggestion Effect]
In the fifth embodiment, (A) when the 100th variation display is executed after being controlled to the low probability state after power on, or (B) the 100th variation after being controlled to the low probability state after the big hit When the display is executed, if the variation pattern is a variation pattern with reach (that is, the variation pattern is "normal reach lost", "normal reach big hit", "super reach A lost", "super reach A big hit", When the variation pattern is either "super reach B loss" or "super reach B big hit"), when the reach state in the variation pattern is established, a predetermined after the reach state in the variation pattern is established It is possible to execute the fifth special suggestion effect as the special suggestion effect at the timing (in this example, at the timing after one second has passed since the establishment of the ready-to-win state).

This fifth special suggestion effect is determined whether or not execution and effect mode are performed based on the determination at the start of fluctuation (effect determination process at the time of start of fluctuation), and whether or not RAM clear processing is executed at the time of power restoration, and until the relief time is reached. It is a kind of production that suggests the number of fluctuations.

In the fifth embodiment, execution/non-execution of the fifth special suggestive effect is determined, and only when it is decided not to execute the fifth special suggestive effect, execution/non-execution of the normal dialogue announcement effect is determined.

In this fifth special suggestive effect, the character D and the special dialogue display among the dialogue displays are displayed in the central portion of the screen of the image display device 5 . It is assumed that the special dialogue display includes character information corresponding to the contents of what the character D has said, which suggests that the RAM clearing process has not been executed at the time of power restoration. In this example, it is assumed that the character information of the special dialogue display is displayed as "Deferred!?".

In the fifth embodiment, the character D uses a common effect image in the effects of the fifth special suggestive effect and the normal advance notice effect, and the contents suggested by the character information of the dialogue display are different. The dialogue display of the fifth special suggestive effect suggests that the RAM clearing process is not executed at the time of power restoration, and the dialogue display of the normal dialogue forewarning effect suggests the degree of expectation for a big win. Hereinafter, the fifth special suggestive effect may be referred to as a special dialogue forewarning effect.

[Production example of the fifth special suggestive production]
An example of an effect when the fifth special suggestion effect is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 9-31. FIG. 9-31 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to each of these effects. FIGS. 9-31 (2A) to (2C) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images related to each effect when the fifth special suggestive effect is not executed, but the normal dialogue forewarning effect is executed. 9-31 (2D) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to each effect when the fifth special suggestive effect is executed and the normal dialogue foretelling effect is not executed.

In this example, (A) the 100th fluctuation display after being controlled to a low probability state after power on, or (B) the 100th fluctuation display after being controlled to a low probability state after a big hit, and the fluctuation pattern is It is assumed that variable display is being performed in the case of a variable pattern involving reach.

As shown in FIG. 9-31 (1), the CUP 103 executes the variable display of the first special symbol, and at the timing when the ready-to-reach state in the variable pattern should be established, the effect control CPU 120 displays the image display device 5 The ready-to-win state is set by stopping and displaying the decoration pattern of "2" in the pattern display area 5L and the pattern display area 5R, and characters "ready-to-win" are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r, the variable display of the small patterns is executed. That is, in the small pattern display area 5l corresponding to the pattern display area 5L in which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, and the small pattern display area 5r corresponding to the pattern display area 5R in which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, the small patterns are also stopped. The variable display is continued without displaying.

9-31 (active display, reserved display, special display, first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, background image, etc.) Since it is the same as the effect structure of FIGS. 9-11, the explanation is omitted.

(Example of production when normal dialogue announcement production [chance] is executed)
Next, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (2A), at the timing of one second after the ready-to-win state is established, the effect control CPU 120 executes the normal dialogue forewarning effect [chance], and the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. A character D07TM100D and a normal dialogue display 07TM101 (in this example, "Chance??") are displayed in the center.

The character D07TM100D and the normal dialogue display 07TM101 are images having a higher display priority than the decorative pattern and the background image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the player's point of view, the character D07TM100D, the normal dialogue display 07TM101, the decoration pattern, and the background image appear to be displayed in this order from the front to the back.

(Example of production when normal dialogue announcement production [extreme heat] is executed)
Next, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (2B), at the timing of one second after the ready-to-win state is established, the effect control CPU 120 executes the normal dialogue forewarning effect [great heat], and the image display device 5 A character D07TM100D and a normal dialogue display 07TM102 (in this example, the characters "Super heat!!") are displayed in the center of the screen.

The character D07TM100D and the normal dialogue display 07TM102 are images having a higher display priority than the decorative pattern and the background image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in front). Therefore, from the player's point of view, the character D07TM100D, the normal dialogue display 07TM102, the decoration pattern, and the background image appear to be displayed in this order from the front to the back.

(Example of production when normal dialogue announcement production [FEVER] is executed)
Next, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (2C), at the timing when one second has passed since the ready-to-win state was established, the effect control CPU 120 executes the normal dialogue forewarning effect [FEVER], and the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. A character D07TM100D and a normal dialogue display 07TM103 (characters "FEVER!!" in this example) are displayed in the central portion.

The character D07TM100D and the normal dialogue display 07TM103 are images having a higher display priority than the decorative pattern and the background image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in front). Therefore, from the player's point of view, the character D07TM100D, the normal dialogue display 07TM103, the decoration pattern, and the background image appear to be displayed in this order from the front to the back.

(Example of production when the fifth special suggestive production is executed)
Next, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (2D), at the timing of one second after the ready-to-win state is established, the effect control CPU 120 executes the fifth special suggestion effect, and the central part of the screen of the image display device 5 , a character D07TM100D and a special dialogue display 07TM104 (in this example, the characters "Stationary!?") are displayed.

The character D07TM100D and the special dialogue display 07TM104 are images having a higher display priority than the decorative pattern and the background image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in front). Therefore, from the player's point of view, the character D07TM100D, the special dialogue display 07TM104, the decoration pattern, and the background image appear to be displayed in this order from the front to the back.

<[For the 100th change after turning on the power] Execution/non-execution of the fifth special suggestion effect and effect mode determination table>
As shown in FIG. 9-32(A), [For the 100th change after turning on the power] In the execution/non-execution of the fifth special suggestive effect and effect mode determination table, whether or not the RAM clear processing specified by the initialization command is executed , a determination value for determining whether or not to execute the fifth special suggestion effect and the mode of effect is assigned.

Effect control CPU120, when the execution presence or absence of the RAM clear process is "no execution" (when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0 to 800"), the fifth special at a rate of 20% It is decided not to execute the suggestive effect, and it is decided to execute the fifth special suggestive effect at a rate of 80%.

Effect control CPU120, when the execution presence or absence of the RAM clear process is "executed" (when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "800"), the fifth special suggestion effect at a rate of 40% is decided not to be executed, and the fifth special suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 60%.

<Execution/non-execution of normal dialogue forewarning effect and effect mode determination table>
As shown in FIG. 9-32(B), [for the 100th change after turning on the power] in the execution/non-execution and effect mode determination table of the normal dialogue announcement effect, the normal Determination values are assigned for determining whether or not to execute the speech announcement effect and the mode of effect.

When the display result is "missing", the performance control CPU 120 decides not to execute the normal dialogue forewarning performance at a rate of 40%, and executes the normal dialogue foretelling performance [chance] at a rate of 55%. It is decided to execute the normal dialogue forewarning effect [Gekiketsu] at a rate of 5%.

The performance control CPU 120 decides not to execute the normal dialogue forewarning performance at a rate of 20% when the display result is a ``big win'', and executes the normal dialogue foretelling performance [chance] at a rate of 60%. It is determined that the normal dialogue forewarning effect [Gekiketsu] is to be executed at a rate of 15%, and the normal dialogue forewarning effect [FEVER] is to be executed at a rate of 5%.

<[For the 100th variation after the big hit] Execution/non-execution of the fifth special suggestion effect and effect mode determination table>
As shown in FIG. 9-32 (C), [for the 100th variation after the big hit] execution presence/absence of the fifth special suggestion effect and effect mode determination table, whether or not the RAM clear processing specified by the initialization command is executed Accordingly, determination values for determining whether or not to execute the fifth special suggestion effect and the effect mode are assigned.

Effect control CPU120, when the execution presence or absence of the RAM clear process is "no execution" (when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "800"), the fifth special suggestion effect at a rate of 50% is decided not to be executed, and the fifth special suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 50%.

Effect control CPU120, when the execution presence or absence of the RAM clear process is "executed" (when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "800"), the fifth special suggestion effect at a rate of 70% is decided not to be executed, and the fifth special suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 30%.

<Execution/non-execution of normal dialogue forewarning effect and effect mode determination table>
As shown in FIG. 9-32 (D), [for the 100th change after the big hit] normal dialogue execution presence/absence and effect mode determination table, according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, the normal dialogue A determination value is assigned for determining whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the mode of effect.

When the display result is "missing", the performance control CPU 120 decides not to execute the normal dialogue forewarning performance at a rate of 40%, and executes the normal dialogue foretelling performance [chance] at a rate of 55%. It is decided to execute the normal dialogue forewarning effect [Gekiketsu] at a rate of 5%.

The performance control CPU 120 decides not to execute the normal dialogue forewarning performance at a rate of 20% when the display result is a ``big win'', and executes the normal dialogue foretelling performance [chance] at a rate of 60%. It is determined that the normal dialogue forewarning effect [Gekiketsu] is to be executed at a rate of 15%, and the normal dialogue forewarning effect [FEVER] is to be executed at a rate of 5%.

As shown in FIGS. 9-32 (B) and (D), the degree of expectation for a big hit increases in the order of normal dialogue preview effect [chance]<normal dialogue preview effect [very hot]<normal dialogue preview effect [FEVER]. ing. In addition, the normal dialogue forewarning effect [FEVER] is a big hit determination effect in which a big win is confirmed.

[Sixth embodiment]
In the sixth embodiment, when the variation pattern of the 100th variation display after being controlled to the low probability state after turning on the power is "normal reach lost", the display result is notified by stopping display of the combination of decorative symbols. At the timing, a sixth special suggestion effect (see FIGS. 9-33 (2B) and (3B)), which will be described later, can be executed as a special suggestion effect that suggests that the RAM clearing process has not been executed when the gaming machine is powered on. is.

In the sixth embodiment, when the variation pattern is "normal reach out", the display result is " A combination of decorative symbols that will be "lost" is stopped and displayed.

In the sixth embodiment, when the decoration pattern stopped and displayed in the pattern display area 5L and the pattern display area 5R of the image display device 5 when the ready-to-win state is reached, the super-ready-to-win is always achieved. shall develop. Therefore, when the variation pattern is "normal reach lost", the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 when the reach state occurs are different from "7". It becomes a kind of decorative pattern (“1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “8”, “9”). In the following description, decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5 in the ready-to-win state may be referred to as ready-to-win symbols.

In the sixth embodiment, when the variation pattern is "normal reach lost", in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the combination of decorative patterns that results in a display result of "miss" is stopped and displayed. At this time, a decorative pattern different from "7" is stopped and displayed in the pattern display area 5C. Below, the decoration design corresponding to the design display area 5C may be described as a medium design.

For example, when the variation pattern is "normal reach lost", the reach pattern becomes a decorative pattern other than "7" (such as "2"), and when notifying that the display result is "missed", "7 ” and decorative symbols other than the ready-to-win symbol (“2”) are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol.

[6th Special Suggestion Effect]
In the sixth embodiment, when the variation pattern of the 100th variation display after being controlled to the low probability state after turning on the power is "normal reach lost", the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed and the display result is "missed". , it is possible to execute a sixth special suggestive effect, which will be described later, as a special suggestive effect suggesting that the RAM clear process has not been executed when the game machine is powered on.

In this sixth special suggestive effect, at the timing of notifying that the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and the display result is "lost", the decorative symbol "7" is displayed in the symbol display area 5C of the image display device 5. It is assumed that the stop display is performed in an emphasized manner (an enlarged manner in this example).

[Production example of the sixth special suggestive production]
An example of an effect when the sixth special suggestion effect is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 9-33. FIG. 9-33 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to each of these effects. Figures 9-33 (2A) and (3A) show the combination of decorative symbols in which the sixth special suggestive effect is not executed and the display result in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 is "missing". 9-33 (2B) and (3B) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images related to each effect when is stopped and displayed, and FIGS. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to each effect when a combination of decorative symbols with a display result of "loss" is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R;

In this example, (A) is the 100th fluctuation display after being controlled to the low probability state after power-on, and the fluctuation display in the case where the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach out" is assumed to be executed. do.

The rendering configuration in FIG. 9-33(1) is the same as the rendering configuration in FIG. 9-31(1) when the ready-to-win state in the variation pattern is established, so the description is omitted.

9-33 (active display, reserved display, special display, first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, background image, small pattern, etc.). Since it is the same as the effect structure of FIGS. 9-11 in the embodiment, the description is omitted.

(When the 6th special suggestive effect is not executed)
Next, as shown in FIG. 9-33 (2A), at the timing when the combination of decorative symbols should be stopped and displayed to notify that the display result is "lost", the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5. In the design display area 5C, the decoration design of "1" is stopped and displayed (swinging is stopped). In other words, the combination of decorative symbols ("212" in this example) that results in a display result of "missing" is stopped (swinging is stopped).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-33 (3A), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 having received the symbol confirmation designation command causes the image display device 5 to display the small symbol. In areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the combination of decorative symbols ("212" in this example) is fixed and stopped. In other words, the combination of the decorative symbols whose display result is "loss" is determined and stopped.

(When the 6th special suggestive effect is executed)
Next, as shown in FIG. 9-33 (2B), at the timing when the combination of decorative symbols should be stopped and displayed to notify that the display result is "lost", the effect control CPU 120 executes the sixth special suggestion effect. is executed, and in the pattern display area 5C of the image display device 5, the decoration pattern of "7" is stopped and displayed (swinging stop) in an emphasized manner. In other words, the combination of decorative symbols ("272" in this example) that results in a display result of "missing" is stopped (swinging is stopped).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-33 (3B), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 having received the symbol confirmation designation command causes the image display device 5 to display the small symbol. In areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the combination of decorative symbols ("272" in this example) is fixed and stopped. In other words, the combination of the decorative symbols whose display result is "loss" is determined and stopped.

<[For the 100th change after turning on the power] Execution/non-execution of the 6th special suggestion effect and effect mode determination table>
As shown in FIG. 9-34, in the [for 100th change after power-on] execution/non-execution of the sixth special suggestive effect and effect mode determination table, depending on whether or not the RAM clear processing specified by the initialization command is executed, , determination values for determining whether or not to execute the sixth special suggestion effect and the mode of effect are assigned.

Effect control CPU120, when the execution presence or absence of the RAM clear process is "no execution" (when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0 to 800"), the sixth special at a rate of 20% It is determined not to execute the suggestive performance (the middle pattern other than "7" is stopped), and it is determined to execute the sixth special suggestive performance ("7" is stopped in the middle pattern) at a rate of 80%.

Effect control CPU120, when the execution presence or absence of the RAM clear process is "executed" (when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "800"), the sixth special suggestion effect at a rate of 70% is not executed (medium symbols other than "7" are stopped), and the sixth special suggestive effect is executed at a rate of 30% (medium symbol "7" is stopped).

[Seventh embodiment]
In the seventh embodiment, when the display result is "lost" in spite of execution of an effect with a high expectation of a big hit (money active change effect, which will be described later), the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. A seventh special suggestive effect (see FIG. 9-35), which will be described later, can be executed as a special suggestive effect suggesting that the process has not been executed.

[Active change effect]
In the seventh embodiment, when a starting winning corresponding to the 100th variation display after power-on occurs, the final display mode of the active display is changed to [for the 100th variation after power-on] final display mode of the active display. It can be determined based on a decision table (see FIG. 9-36). When the final display mode of the active display is different from the normal mode, an active change effect for changing the display mode of the active display is executed.

In the seventh embodiment, when the final display mode of the active display is the blue mode, it is possible to execute the blue active change effect to change the active display to the blue mode, and the final display mode of the active display is the red mode. In some cases, it is possible to execute a red active change effect that changes the active display to a red mode, and if the final display mode of the active display is a gold mode, a gold active change effect that changes the active display to a gold mode. is executable.

In the seventh embodiment, when the gold active change effect is executed and the active display in the gold mode is displayed, the active display in the display modes other than the gold mode (normal mode, blue mode, red mode) is displayed. It is assumed that the degree of expectation for a big hit is extremely high (see FIG. 9-36).

[Seventh Special Suggestion Effect]
In the seventh embodiment, when the display result of the 100th variable display after being controlled to the low probability state after turning on the power is "missing", when the gold active change effect is executed, A seventh special suggestion effect, which will be described later, can be executed as a special suggestion effect suggesting that the RAM clearing process has not been executed when the power is turned on. This seventh special suggestion effect is an effect in which the final display result is "miss" after the gold active change effect is executed.

Therefore, at the timing when the gold active change effect is executed, the player can recognize that the degree of expectation for the big win is high, and at the timing when the display result is "big win", the RAM clearing process is executed for the player. It is possible to recognize that there is a high possibility that the

In other words, when the gold active changing effect with a high expectation of a big win is executed and the player who was expecting a big win feels disappointed that the final display result is "lost", the gold active By suggesting that the RAM clearing process is not executed by the final display result becoming ``missing'' after execution of the change performance, the player's sense of regret can be reduced and the game can be continued. can encourage

[Production example of the seventh special suggestive production]
An example of an effect when the seventh special suggestion effect is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 9-35. FIG. 9-35 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to each of these effects. FIG. 9-35 (3A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image when the seventh special suggestive effect is not executed, and FIG. 9-35 (3B) is an example of the effect image when the seventh special suggestive effect is executed. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image;

In this example, it is the 100th variation display after being controlled to a low-probability state after turning on the power, and FIG. It is assumed that the gold active change effect is being executed. Also, in FIG. 9-35 (3B), it is assumed that the gold active change effect is executed when the variation pattern is the variation pattern of "super reach A lost".

As shown in FIG. 9-35 (1), the effect control CPU 120 executes a super reach A effect (battle effect) at the timing when the variation pattern should be developed to super reach, and displays the image display device 5 as a friend character 07TM390A. , the enemy character 07TM390B, and the characters "VS" are displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 is executing the gold active change effect, and displays the gold mode active display 07TM003G corresponding to the variable display currently being executed in the active display area 07TM013.

9-35 (holding display, special display, first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, background image, small pattern, etc.) Since it is the same as the effect structure of FIGS. 9-11, the explanation is omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-35 (2), the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the friend character 07TM390A and the enemy character 07TM390B, and the battle is displayed on the left and right screen regions of the image display device 5. A battle effect image suggesting that the victory or defeat of the game is decided is displayed.

(Example of production when the seventh special suggestive production is not executed)
Next, as shown in FIG. 9-35 (3A), at the timing when the winning effect in the variation pattern should be executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the winning effect and notifies that the display result will be a "big hit". . In the victory effect, the image display device 5 is displayed with the ally character 07TM390A, which has won against the enemy character 07TM390B, and the characters "Victory" are displayed in the central part of the image display device 5, and the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Then, the combination of decorative symbols ("222" in this example) suggesting that the display result will be a "big hit" is stopped and displayed. At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to variably display the small patterns.

(Example of production when the seventh special suggestive production is executed)
Next, as shown in FIG. 9-35 (3B), at the timing at which the defeat effect should be executed in the variation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 executes the defeat effect and notifies that the display result is "lost". . In the defeat effect, the image display device 5 is displayed with the character 07TM390A defeated by the enemy character 07TM390B, and the character "defeat" is displayed in the central part of the image display device 5, and the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Then, the combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "212") suggesting that the display result is "loss" is stopped and displayed. At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to variably display the small patterns.

At this time, since the effect control CPU 120 is executing the defeat effect while executing the money active change effect, the seventh special suggestion effect is being executed.

<[For 100th change after power-on] Final display mode determination table for active display>
As shown in FIG. 9-36, in the final display mode determination table for [100th change after power-on] active display, the display result specified by the display result specifying command and the RAM clear specified by the initialization specifying command are displayed. A determination value for determining the final display mode of the active display is assigned according to whether or not processing is executed.

When the display result is "no", the effect control CPU 120 sets the final display mode of the active display to the normal mode at a rate of 80% when the execution status of the RAM clearing process is "no execution". 15% decided to set the final display mode of the active display to the blue mode, 4% decided to set the final display mode of the active display to the red mode, and 1% determined to set the final display mode of the active display to the red mode. It is decided that the final display mode of the active display should be the gold mode. That is, it is decided to execute the seventh special suggestion effect at a rate of 1%.

When the display result is "no" and the execution status of the RAM clearing process is "executed", the effect control CPU 120 changes the final display mode of the active display to the normal mode at a rate of 80.5%. 15% decided that the final display mode of the active display should be the blue mode, 4% decided that the final display mode of the active display should be the red mode, and 0.5 % determines that the final display mode of the active display should be the gold mode. That is, it is decided to execute the seventh special suggestion effect at a rate of 0.5%.

When the display result is a "jackpot", the effect control CPU 120 decides to set the final display mode of the active display to the normal mode at a rate of 55%, regardless of whether or not the RAM clearing process is executed. , 15% decided to make the final display mode of the active display red, and 10% decided to make the final display of the active display a blue mode. It is decided that the aspect shall be the golden aspect.

[Other Modifications]
(1) In the above embodiment, the occurrence of a big hit or the time saving state is controlled via the arrival of the relief time saving, but not limited to such a form, the display result is "missing" When there is, without going through the jackpot game, it may include the "loss with time saving" that is controlled from the next variable display to the high base state (time saving state).

For example, when the missing symbol with time saving is stopped and displayed in the normal state, (1) time saving control is performed 100 times, and (2) time saving state C in which low probability control is performed 100 times (in this example, Chance time of 100 times of time saving number of times) is controlled.

Even if the lost symbols with time saving are stopped and displayed in the high base state (probability variable state, time saving state), the transition control of the game state is not performed (the time saving state of 100 times of time saving is not controlled). This is in order not to reduce the degree of relief for the player. For example, if it is configured to re-control to the time-saving state of 100 times of time-savings based on the stopped display of lost symbols with time-savings while being controlled to the probability variable state that is likely to result in a big hit, the player This is not preferable because it results in control from an advantageous state to a disadvantageous state. Therefore, only when the game state under control when the lost symbols with time saving are stopped and displayed is the normal state, the game is configured to be controlled to the time saving state of 100 times of the number of time saving.

(2) In the above embodiment, the special display change effect is terminated at the timing when the variable display in which the special display change effect is executed ends. The special display change effect may not end at the timing when the variable display in which the effect is executed ends.

For example, the end timing of the special display change effect may be the timing after the variable display is executed a plurality of times after the special display change effect is executed. Also, the end timing of the special display change effect may be set to the time when the variable display that reaches the relief time reduction is executed, or the time when the variable display that results in a big hit is executed.

(3) In the above embodiment, (A) the 100th variation display after turning on the power, or (B) the 100th variation display after the big hit, the second special suggestion effect can be executed when changing the stage. example has been shown, but it is not limited to such a form, and execution of the second special suggestion effect may be restricted under specific conditions.

For example, in the variable display in which the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 10 or less, the execution of the second special suggestion effect may be restricted while the countdown effect is being executed.

(4) In the above embodiment, the 100 × Nth (N is an integer of 1 or more) fluctuation display after being controlled to a low-probability state after (A) power-on at the timing when the periodic light-emitting effect should be executed. (B) When the 100×N-th fluctuation display is executed after being controlled to the low-probability state after the big hit), an example is shown in which the third special suggestion performance can be executed. At this time, the table for determining whether or not to execute the third special suggestion effect and the effect mode is a common table regardless of the number of fluctuations. However, without being limited to such a form, the table for determining whether or not to execute the third special suggestion effect and the effect mode may be a different table according to the number of times of variation.

For example, (A) when the 100 × N-th (N is an integer of 1 to 6) fluctuation display is executed after being controlled to a low-probability state after power-on, or (B) Control to a low-probability state after a big hit When the 100×N-th variable display (N is an integer from 1 to 6) is executed after the display, the first table (see FIG. 9-28) is used as a table for determining whether or not to execute the third special suggestive effect and the mode of effect. ), determine whether or not to execute the third special suggestive effect and the mode of effect, and (C) the 100×M-th (M is an integer of 7 to 9) variable display after being controlled to the low-probability state after the power is turned on. is executed, or (D) when the 100×M-th (M is an integer of 7 to 9) fluctuation display is executed after being controlled to the low probability state after the big hit, the third special suggestive effect is executed. Whether or not to execute the third special suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined based on a second table different from the first table described above as a table for determining the presence/absence and effect mode. At this time, in the second table, the execution ratio of the third special suggestive effect [green] and the third special suggestive effect [red] may be higher than the execution ratio of the third special suggestive effect [blue]. .

Also, in the variable display of the first cycle (100×1=100th time) after the game machine is powered on, if the RAM clear process is not executed when the power is turned on, the third special suggestive effect [green ] and the third special suggestive effect [red] may be higher than the execution ratio of the third special suggestive effect [blue].

(5) In the above-described embodiment, the fourth special suggestion effect is that the effect stage shifts to the volcano stage over a predetermined period from the first fluctuation display after the power is turned on, and the fifth background image 07TM250 is used as the background image of the decorative design. is displayed, but it is not limited to such a form, and the fourth special suggestive effect may be started at a timing different from the first variable display after the power is turned on.

For example, the fourth special suggestive effect may be started at the timing when any one of the first to tenth variable displays after power-on is executed. At this time, depending on the start timing of the fourth special suggestive effect, the degree of expectation that the RAM clear process is not executed may be varied.

Further, as the fourth special suggestive effect, an effect of starting the variable display of decorative symbols in a special mode different from the normal mode may be executed. For example, the variable display of decorative patterns in a normal mode at the time of start of fluctuation means that the decorative patterns are smoothly scrolled from the top to the bottom. The display may be a scroll display in which the decoration pattern is not smooth from the top to the bottom (scroll display after the decoration pattern moves in the pattern display area at the start of the fluctuation).

(6) In the above embodiment, the fourth special suggestion effect is not executed when the RAM clear process is being executed. Even if there is, the fourth special suggestion effect may be executed.

(7) In the above-described embodiment, regardless of the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the relief time reduction, the ratio of determining the production mode of the fourth special suggestion production is common. Not limited to this, the ratio of determining the effect mode of the fourth special suggestion effect may be varied according to the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the relief time saving.

For example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the relief time saving is 50 times or less, the fourth special suggestion effect may be executed until the relief time saving is reached.

(8) In the above-described embodiment, an example of providing a plurality of types of rendering modes with different execution periods as the rendering mode of the fourth special suggestive rendering has been shown. As a mode, a plurality of types of production stages may be provided.

For example, as the production mode of the fourth special suggestive production, the production stage shifts to the volcano stage (the background image of the decorative design is the fifth background image), and the production stage is the space stage (the background image of the decorative design includes the universe and a mode of transitioning to a sixth background image) may be provided. At this time, the fourth special suggestive effect in which the effect stage shifts to the space stage has a higher degree of expectation than the fourth special suggestive effect in which the effect stage shifts to the volcano stage because the RAM clear process has not been executed. may Also, the fourth special suggestive effect in which the effect stage shifts to the space stage may be an effect in which it is determined that the RAM clear process has not been executed.

Further, the determination ratio of the production mode of the fourth special suggestive production may be varied according to the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the relief time saving. For example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the relief time reduction is small, the fourth special suggestion production in which the production stage shifts to the volcano stage than when the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the relief time reduction is large may be executed at a higher rate, or the rate at which the fourth special suggestion effect in which the effect stage shifts to the space stage may be executed may be increased.

(9) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the fifth special suggestion effect can be executed regardless of which display result the display result is. The execution ratio of the fifth special suggestive effect may be varied depending on whether the display result is .

For example, when the display result is "big hit", the execution ratio of the fifth special suggestive effect may be 0%. That is, the execution of the fifth special suggestive effect may be restricted, and the normal dialogue forewarning effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win may be preferentially executed.

(10) In the above-described embodiment, when the normal dialogue forewarning effect is executed, the character D and the normal dialogue are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 (“chance??” characters, characters "FEVER!!") are displayed to suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and other production devices different from the image display device 5 may be used. You may execute a normal dialogue forewarning effect.

For example, in the normal dialog preview effect [Chance] and the normal dialog preview effect [Super Heat], the character D and the normal dialog are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 (“Chance?” ) is displayed. On the other hand, in the normal speech announcement effect [FEVER], the character D and the normal speech display (characters "FEVER!!") are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the speech is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. ("FEVER!!") may be reproduced and output.

(11) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the fifth special suggestive effect can be executed after the big hit, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the execution of the fifth special suggestive effect may be restricted after the big win.

For example, in the 100th variation display after the big hit, when it is decided to execute the fifth special suggestion performance, even if the normal dialogue announcement performance with a low degree of expectation for the big win is executed instead of the fifth special suggestion performance. good.

(12) In the above-described embodiment, in the normal dialog announcement effect and the fifth special suggestion effect, an example was shown in which the character D and the dialog display were displayed at the same timing. The timing at which D is displayed and the timing at which the dialogue display is displayed may be different.

For example, in the normal dialogue announcement effect and the fifth special suggestion effect, the dialogue display may be displayed after the character D is displayed. In the normal dialogue announcement performance and the fifth special suggestion performance, the common character D is displayed first, and then the dialogue display with a different suggesting target is displayed afterward, so that attention is drawn to which dialogue display is displayed. can be done.

(13) In the above embodiment, regardless of which production stage the production stage is, the display mode of the decoration pattern (font of the number pattern, etc.) is common. The display mode of the decoration pattern may be changed according to which production stage the production stage is.

For example, when it is controlled to the sunny stage, the display mode of the decorative pattern is the first mode (the font of the number pattern is Gothic), and when it is controlled to the cloudy stage, the display mode of the decorative pattern may be the second mode (the font of the number pattern is Mincho).

In this way, even if a configuration is adopted in which the display mode of the decoration pattern differs depending on which production stage the production stage is, "7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol in the sixth special suggestive production. indicates that the RAM clearing process has not been executed.

(14) In the above embodiment, when the sixth special suggestive effect is executable and the sixth special suggestive effect is not executed, one of the decorative symbols other than "7" in the medium symbol is stopped. Although an example of display has been shown, the display is not limited to such a form, and when the sixth special suggestive effect is not executed in a situation where the sixth special suggestive effect can be executed, a specific decoration pattern is stopped and displayed in the medium pattern. good too.

For example, in a situation where the sixth special suggestive effect can be executed, when the sixth special suggestive effect is not executed, a decorative pattern close to "7" ("6" or "8") may be stopped and displayed in the medium pattern. .

(15) In the above-described embodiment, an example was given in which the seventh special suggestive effect suggesting that the RAM clearing process was not executed was shown. An eighth special suggestive effect in which it is determined that the player has not been selected may be executed.

For example, the gold active change effect in the variable display in which the final display result is "loss" was set as the seventh special suggestive effect, but it is less than the gold active change effect in the variable display in which the final display result is "loss". A high-expectation performance with a high degree of expectation for a big hit (money cut-in performance, etc.) may be used as the eighth special suggestive performance. Also, the high-expectation effect (money cut-in effect, etc.) in the variable display after the big win may be the effect that the big win is confirmed.

(16) In the above embodiment, the execution ratio of the red active change effect and the gold active change effect is common regardless of the number of times of change. The execution ratio may be varied according to the number of fluctuations.

For example, the variable display up to the 100th time after the power is turned on may have a higher rate of execution of the gold active change effect than the variable display after the 101st time after the power is turned on.

(17) In the above embodiment, the special suggestive effect is an effect suggesting that the RAM clearing process is being executed. It may be an effect that confirms that the process is being executed.

(18) In the above embodiment, even if the remaining number of fluctuations until reaching the relief time reduction is any number of fluctuations, an example in which the special suggestion effect can be executed was shown, but not limited to such a form, Execution of the special suggestive effect may be restricted according to the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the relief time saving.

For example, if the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the relief time reduction is less than 700 times, while the special suggestion production can be executed, if the remaining number of fluctuations until reaching the relief time reduction is 701 times or more may limit the execution of special suggestive effects.

(19) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which a special suggestive effect can be executed in the variable display after a big hit, but this is not limited to such a form, and a special suggestive effect can be executed in the variable display after a big win. may be restricted.

For example, in the variation display after the big win, when the configuration for restricting the execution of the special suggestion performance is adopted, the characters (character A, character B, character C) used in the special suggestion performance are displayed in the variation display after the big win. In this case, in a game machine in which set values relating to the probability of winning a big win, the rate of winning balls, etc., can be set, a high setting performance in which a high set value is determined or a big win determination performance in which a big win is determined may be performed.

(20) In the above embodiment, when it is stated that [execution of production is restricted], an example of [preventing production from being executed] is shown, but not limited to such a form, If it is described as [Limit the execution of effects], [Prohibit execution of effects], [Reduce the execution ratio of effects], [Perform some effects out of multiple effects (execute only a predetermined type of effect out of a plurality of types of effect, execute only a predetermined type of effect out of a plurality of types of effect)], [do not execute effect, instead execute other effect] may include

(21) In the above-described embodiment, a pre-reading forewarning effect may be executed to suggest (notice) the degree of expectation for a big hit in the variable display before execution (variable display for which execution is suspended). You may perform the big-hit determination production|presentation which determines that it will become. When the big win confirmation performance is being executed as the look-ahead foretelling performance, the execution of the special suggestion performance may be restricted.

For example, when a big win determination effect (a rainbow pending change effect that changes the pending display to a rainbow color) is being executed as a look-ahead advance notice effect, the execution of the special suggestion effect may be restricted.

In the above-described embodiment, two types of display results, "lost" and "big hit", are provided as the display results, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and other display results may be provided.

For example, in addition to "loss" and "big win", "minor win" may be provided as a display result. The small win winning probability may be higher than the big winning winning probability, the small winning winning probability may be lower than the big winning winning probability, and the small winning winning probability may be the same as the big winning winning probability. When the display result of the variable display becomes "small win", it is controlled to a small win game state (special game state). In the small winning game state, the opening control of the big winning opening is performed for a shorter period or less times than in the big winning game state (advantageous state). For example, the small winning game state is 2 rounds, and the opening time of the big winning opening in the small winning game state is 1.0 second.

When this small hit occurs, a special suggestive effect may be executed. For example, as an effect during the small win game, the entire screen of the image display device 5 is a small win image in which information related to the effect of the game machine (four effect images related to the high expectation effect installed in the game machine) is displayed. shall be displayed. When the small winning image is displayed, a special suggestive performance is executed, and characters (character A, character B, character C) suggesting that the RAM clearing process is not executed are displayed superimposed on the small winning image. may

(22) In the above embodiment, an external output terminal for outputting data such as game information (jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), etc.) to be supplied to the hall management computer installed outside is provided. It is assumed that the pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with it. At this time, it is assumed that "outer end A" and "outer end B" are provided as external output terminals for outputting data of big win information (information indicating the number of occurrences of big wins, etc.). Further, it is assumed that an "outer end B" is provided as an external output terminal for outputting data of small win information (information indicating the number of occurrences of small wins, etc.) when a small win occurs. That is, when the jackpot game state is controlled, the signal is output from the "outer end A" and the "outer end B", while when the small win game state is controlled, the signal is output from the "outer end A". No signal is output from , and a signal is output only from the "outer end B".

Further, it is assumed that a pattern confirmation stop signal is output from the "outer end C", which is an external output terminal of the gaming machine, each time the variable display is executed in the gaming machine. Here, at least the outer ends B and C are assumed to be connected to a gaming device (for example, a data display device installed above the gaming machine) installed corresponding to the gaming machine. In this gaming device, the number of times of variable display being displayed (so-called variation number) is incremented by one each time the variable display is executed, based on the input of the signal of "outer end C". . Then, when the "outer end B" signal is input, the variable display count (fluctuation count) is reset to 0, and the big hit count (hit count) is incremented by one.

In this way, by commonly outputting the data of the big win information and the data of the small win information from the outer end B, the number of occurrences of the big wins displayed on the data counter or the like installed outside the game machine can be compared with the number of occurrences of the small wins. can include the number of occurrences of Therefore, even when a small hit occurs, the number of fluctuations displayed on the data counter is initialized and counted from "0". That is, it is possible to prevent the player from accurately recognizing the number of fluctuations after the big win.

(23) In the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 that receives the recovery time relief time reduction number designation command, which is a performance control command that specifies the value of the relief time reduction number counter when the power is turned on, specifies the value of the relief time reduction number counter. Then, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter reaches a specified value, a special suggestive effect is executed. At this time, the performance control CPU 120, which has failed to receive the command for specifying the number of relief time reduction times during recovery, which is the performance control command for designating the value of the relief time reduction number counter when the power is turned on, may limit the execution of the special suggestion performance.

For example, when the effect control CPU 120 fails to receive the recovery time relief time reduction number designation command when the power is turned on, the process of determining whether or not to execute the special suggestive effect may be skipped, or the effect mode of the special suggestive effect Of these, it is possible to determine the effect mode suggesting that the RAM clearing process has not been executed, but the effect mode that confirms that the RAM clearing process has not been executed may not be determined.

(24) In the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 that receives the recovery time relief time reduction number designation command, which is a performance control command that specifies the value of the relief time reduction number counter when the power is turned on, specifies the value of the relief time reduction number counter. Then, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter reaches a specified value, a countdown effect or a relief time-saving arrival effect is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 that could not receive the recovery time reduction time number designation command, which is the effect control command that designates the value of the relief time reduction counter when the power is turned on, limits the execution of the countdown effect and the relief time reduction arrival effect. may

For example, if the effect control CPU 120 cannot receive the restoration time saving time number designation command when the power is turned on, the process of determining whether or not to execute the countdown effect or the relief time saving effect may be skipped.

(25) In the above embodiment, when setting the specific suggestion effect limit flag in the variable start effect determination process, whether the variable display is performed once after the power is turned on (the value of the relief time reduction counter is "899" or not) is shown, but this is not limited to such a form. It may be determined whether or not the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times or more.

For example, it may be determined whether or not the variable display is executed five times or more after the power is turned on in the process of determining the effect at the time of variation start. Then, if the variable display is not performed five times or more after the power is turned on, the special suggestion effect limit flag may be set. Further, it may be determined whether or not the variable display is performed ten times or more after the power is turned on in the process of determining the effect at the time of variation start. Then, if the variable display has not been executed ten times or more after the power is turned on, the special suggestion effect limit flag may be set.

(26) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the effect mode of the countdown effect is common regardless of whether or not the RAM clear process is executed. Therefore, the countdown effect may be produced in a different manner.

For example, when the RAM clearing process is not executed, the countdown display in the countdown effect may be displayed in red, and when the RAM clearing process is executed, the countdown display in the countdown effect may be displayed in white. .

(27) In the above embodiment, an example of different types of characters including effect images has been shown as the effect mode of the first special suggestion effect. They may be different in points other than the type of character.

For example, in the first special suggestion effects of the A mode and the B mode, the image display device 5 displays a character (small)→character (large). On the other hand, in the first special suggestion effect of the C mode, the image display device 5 displays a character (small)→character (extra-large). What is this character (extra-large)? A character that is displayed larger than the character (large), and is displayed with a special effect image.

In addition, in the first special suggestive effect of the C mode, the special effect sound may be reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R, the main lamp 9a may emit light in a special color, and the movable body ( role) may be moved.

(28) In the above embodiment, an example of different types of characters including effect images was shown as the effect mode of the special display change effect. You may make it differ in points other than a kind.

For example, in the A-mode special display change effect, the special display in the lower right portion of the image display device 5 is changed to the A-mode special display in which the effect image and the character A are displayed together (the same applies to the B mode). On the other hand, in the C-mode special display change effect, the special display in the lower right portion of the image display device 5 is changed to the C-mode special display in which the character C accompanied by the effect image flies from the center of the screen. good too. That is, the C-mode special display change effect may be executed in an emphasized mode rather than the A-mode special display change effect.

(29) In the above-described embodiment, in the C-mode special display change effect, the special display in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 (the characters “game XXX times”) is changed to the C-mode special display (“play time left”). Although an example of changing to the characters "YYY times") is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and in the special display change effect of mode C, a special display ("Game XXX times") is displayed at the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5. characters) may be changed to a C-mode special display (characters of "YYY times left until play time").

For example, in the special display change effect of mode C, a red effect image is displayed around the special display in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5, and the character C is displayed behind the special display.

(30) In the above embodiment, an example of using different effect images for the countdown display in the countdown effect and the special display in the C-mode special display change effect was shown, but the countdown effect is not limited to such a form. A common effect image may be used for the countdown display in 1 and the special display in the special display change effect in C mode.

For example, a countdown display may be displayed in the countdown effect, and an effect image common to the countdown display may be displayed as a special display in the C-mode special display change effect. Also, a special display may be displayed in the C-mode special display change effect, and an effect image common to the F special display may be displayed as the countdown display in the countdown effect.

(31) In the above embodiment, when the special display change effect of the C mode is executed and the special display is displayed on the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5, the period until the relief time reduction is reached or the big hit occurs It is assumed that a special display is displayed on the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 over the entire period. However, not limited to such a form, the special display change effect of the C mode is executed, and after the special display is displayed on the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5, any timing before reaching the relief time reduction or The special display in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 may be changed to the special display at any timing before the big hit occurs.

For example, after the special display change effect of the C mode is executed and the special display is displayed on the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5, the countdown effect starts based on the value of the relief time reduction number counter becoming 10. Then, the special display on the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 may be changed to the special display. Then, it is assumed that a special display is displayed on the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 over a period until the relief working time is reached.

In addition, after the special display change effect of the C mode is executed and the special display is displayed on the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5, any timing before reaching the relief time reduction or before the big hit occurs At the timing of , the special display on the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 may be erased.

(32) In the above embodiment, an example in which seven types of variation patterns are provided as variation patterns has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and other variation patterns may be provided.

For example, among the fluctuation patterns of "no reach", a fluctuation pattern of "shortening fluctuation" having an extremely short fluctuation period may be provided. It is assumed that the variation period of the "non-reach variation" variation pattern is 10 seconds, while the variation period of the "shortening variation variation" variation pattern is 3 seconds.

Note that the case where the variation pattern is the variation pattern of "shortened variation is lost" means the case where the first reserved storage number is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. For example, when the number of first reserved memories is 3 or more, it is possible to determine the variation pattern of "shortened variation out of range" as the variation pattern.

(33) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-17(B), the execution period of the first special suggestion effect is shorter than 4 seconds. For example, the execution period of the first special suggestion effect may be two seconds. At this time, even if the variation pattern is a variation pattern of "shortened variation missed" (3 seconds), if the start timing of the first special suggestion effect is the timing at which the first special suggestion effect is started, the first special suggestion effect ( 2 seconds) can be executed.

Also, for example, the execution period of the first special suggestion effect may be 3.5 seconds. At this time, the execution period (3.5 seconds) of the first special suggestion effect is longer than the fluctuation period (3 seconds) when the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of "shortening fluctuation loss", and the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach It is shorter than the variation period (10 seconds) in the case of the variation pattern of "off". When it is decided to execute the first special suggestion effect when the change pattern is the change pattern of "shortening change failure", the first special suggestion effect is executed over a plurality of times of variable display. Execution period can be secured.

(34) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the special suggestion effect is executed only once during the period from turning on the power or after the jackpot to reaching the relief time reduction. The special suggestive performance may be executed a plurality of times over the period from after the throw-in or after the jackpot to reaching the relief time reduction.

For example, when the first special suggestion effect is executed two or more times after the power is turned on, when the first special suggestion effect of the C mode is executed as the first special suggestion effect after the second time, the red effect image Character C may be displayed with an emphasized golden effect image.

In addition, when the special suggestion performance is executed a plurality of times over the period from turning on the power or after the jackpot to reaching the relief time reduction, the RAM clear processing is performed more than the performance mode of the special suggestion performance executed immediately before. Execution of the special suggestion effect of the effect mode with a low degree of expectation that has not been executed may be restricted.

(35) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the special display is always displayed during the period in which the relief time-saving counter is updated. The special display may be hidden even during the period during which the special display is performed.

For example, if the variation pattern is a variation pattern with super reach, a special display is displayed until it develops into super reach, but when the super reach effect (battle effect, challenge effect) is being executed , the special display may be hidden.

(36) In the above embodiment, when the first special suggestive effect is executed in the variable display that reaches the relief time reduction, the special display 07TM150AD of the A mode and the reaching mode (in this example, "Game MAX" A white effect image is displayed around the special display including the character, and the character A is displayed behind the special display). , the execution of the special display change effect may be restricted when the first special suggestive effect is executed.

For example, when the first special suggestion effect is executed in the variable display that reaches the relief time reduction effect, the special display change effect is executed, and after displaying the special display of the A mode, the middle stage effect in the relief time reduction effect is performed. At the timing of execution, the special display change effect may be terminated and the special display of the arrival mode may be displayed.

(37) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-20 (3A), the variable display is performed a specified number of times (1000 times) in the time saving state B, and the display result is "off" in all variable displays. In the case of , an example was shown in which the special display was not displayed in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5 after the game state was controlled to the normal state, but not limited to such a form, in the time saving state B When the variable display is performed a specified number of times (1000 times) and the display result is "lost" in all the variable displays, a special Display may be displayed.

For example, when the variable display is performed a specified number of times (1000 times) in the time saving state B, and the display result is "missing" in all the variable displays, the image display device 5 after the game state is controlled to the normal state When the special display is displayed on the lower right portion of the screen, the special display may be displayed in such a manner as to inform the player that the value of the relief time saving number counter has not been updated. At this time, the special display may include characters such as "game --- times".

(38) In the above embodiment, the variable display is executed a specified number of times (1000 times) in the time saving state B, and when the display result is "missing" in all the variable displays, the game state is controlled to the normal state. Although an example in which a special suggestion effect can be executed after being displayed is shown, this is not limited to this form, and the variable display is performed a specified number of times (1000 times) in the time saving state B, and the display result is " In the case of "lost", the execution of the special suggestive effect may be restricted after the game state is controlled to the normal state.

For example, in time-saving state B, the variable display is executed a specified number of times (1000 times), and when the display result is "missing" in all variable displays, the game state is set when it is controlled to the normal state. A flag may be provided. When this flag is set, the process of determining whether or not to execute the special suggestive effect may be skipped.

(39) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which whether or not to execute a special suggestive effect is determined according to whether or not the RAM clearing process is executed and the value of the relief time reduction counter. , it may be determined whether or not to execute the special suggestive effect based on other factors.

For example, it is assumed that the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an out discharge switch for detecting that a game ball that has not entered any of the lowest winning holes in the game area has passed through an out hole into which the game ball is taken. . Depending on the number of outs, which is the number of game balls passing through the out port detected by the out discharge switch, whether or not to execute the special suggestive effect may be determined. When the number of outs is large, the execution ratio of the special suggestion effect may be higher than when the number of outs is small.

(40) In the above embodiment, it is determined that the RAM clearing process has not been executed, and the example in which the C-mode special suggestive effect can be executed can specify the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is reached. Although not limited to such a form, a special suggestive effect of a mode (X mode) in which it is determined that the RAM clearing process is not executed, and a mode in which the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the relief time reduction can be specified. (Y mode) may be executed as a special suggestive effect of a different effect mode.

For example, in the variable display after the special suggestive effect of the X mode is executed, the execution ratio of the special suggestive effect of the Y mode may be increased. Further, the execution ratio of the X-mode special suggestive effect may be higher when the special suggestive effect is executed more times than when the special suggestive effect is executed less frequently. Further, the execution ratio of the special suggestive effect of the Y mode may be higher when the number of executions of the special suggestive effect is large than when the number of times of execution of the special suggestive effect is small. Further, in the variable display after the special suggestive effect of the X mode is executed, the execution ratio of the special suggestive effect may be reduced or the execution ratio of the special suggestive effect may be increased. Also, in the variable display after the special suggestive effect of the X mode is executed, the execution ratio of the special suggestive effect of the X mode may be increased. In addition, in the variable display after the execution of the special suggestive effect of the X mode, the execution of the special suggestive effect of the low expected mode (A mode) in which the RAM clear process is not executed may be restricted (execution rate may be lower).

(41) In the above embodiment, (A) in the 100th fluctuation display after being controlled to the low probability state after power on, or (B) in the 100th fluctuation display after being controlled to the low probability state after the big hit , a process for determining whether or not to execute a special suggestive effect is executed, and an example in which a special suggestive effect can be executed has been shown. A configuration capable of executing processing and executing a special suggestive effect may be adopted.

For example, in the second special suggestive effect among the special suggestive effects, when the stage is changed (that is, in the variable display immediately before the effect stage shifts), a process for determining whether or not to execute the second special suggestive effect is executed, A configuration capable of executing the second special suggestion effect may be employed. Therefore, the process of determining whether or not to execute the second special suggestive effect is executed every 25 fluctuations, and the second special suggestive effect can be executed.

For example, in the 5th special suggestion effect among the special suggestion effects, when the variation pattern is "normal reach lost", "super reach A lost", "super reach B lost", it is determined whether or not to execute the 5th special suggestion effect. It is also possible to employ a configuration capable of executing a process for performing a fifth special suggestion effect. Therefore, for each variation pattern in which the display result is "miss" and the ready-to-win state is established, the process of determining whether or not to execute the fifth special suggestive effect is executed, and the fifth special suggestive effect can be executed.

For example, in the 6th special suggestion effect among the special suggestion effects, when the variation pattern is "normal reach lost", the process of determining whether or not to execute the 6th special suggestion effect is executed, and the 6th special suggestion effect can be executed. configuration may be adopted. Therefore, every time the variation pattern is "missing normal reach", the process of determining whether or not to execute the sixth special suggestive effect is executed, and the sixth special suggestive effect can be executed.

For example, in the 7th special suggestion effect among the special suggestion effects, when the display result is "missing" and the high expectation level effect (gold active change effect) is executed, it is determined whether or not to execute the 7th special suggestion effect. A configuration capable of executing the processing and executing the seventh special suggestion effect may be adopted. Therefore, for each variable display in which the display result is "missing" and a high-expectation effect (gold active change effect, etc.) is executed, a process for determining whether or not to execute the seventh special suggestion effect is executed. It becomes possible to perform production.

(42) Of the special suggestive effects (first to eighth special suggestive effects) shown in the above embodiment, only one type of special suggestive effect may be executed, or two types of special suggestive effects may be executed. The above special suggestion effects may be combined and executed. This combination can be set arbitrarily.
In addition, when two or more types of special suggestive effects are provided, the number of variations to be executed may be varied for each type of special suggestive effect. In that case, for example, the third special suggestion effect, the fourth special suggestion effect, the sixth special suggestion effect, and the seventh special suggestion effect, which are difficult for the player to recognize With respect to the special suggestive effect executed in the mode of not notifying that there is something happening), it is made to be executed with a relatively small number of fluctuations such as the 30th or 50th change, and the first special suggestive effect, the second special suggestive effect, With regard to the special suggestive effect executed in a manner relatively easy for the player to recognize, such as the 5th special suggestive effect (a mode in which the player actively notifies that the game is still stationary by means of dialogue or a special character), the 100th change, etc. It may be executed with a relatively large number of fluctuations. Alternatively, among the special suggestive effects, the special suggestive effect of the type that notifies that the deferment is fixed may be executed with a relatively large number of fluctuations such as the 100th change. According to this, since a certain number of fluctuations is required until the player is convinced that the game machine is stationary, the operation can be promoted, and a player who has a deep knowledge of the game machine can play the game advantageously. , can promote long-term continuous operation.
In the above embodiment, the first to third special suggestion effects and the fifth to seventh special suggestion effects are executed at the 100th variation after the power is turned on. Instead of being executed at a predetermined number of fluctuations such as 100th fluctuation, it may be possible to execute at a fluctuation number other than the 100th fluctuation (any number of fluctuations) according to a predetermined ratio. If it is possible to execute the special suggestive effect for a number of fluctuations other than the 100th fluctuation, for example, the execution of the special suggestive effect may be restricted for a certain period of time (for example, 20 fluctuations) after the power is turned on. According to this, even if there is a player who moves to another game machine after confirming whether or not it is stationary, it is possible to ensure operation for a certain period of time after the power is turned on. You can prevent it from getting covered. Conversely, the special suggestion effect may be executed only during a certain period of time (for example, between 100 fluctuations) after the power is turned on. According to this, it is possible to ensure operation for a certain period of time from power-on by the player who confirms whether or not it is stationary, and by playing the game for a certain period of time, the number of fluctuations until reaching the relief time reduction is reduced. , the next player can expect to reach the relief time reduction, and the amusement of the game can be improved.
In addition, when it is possible to execute even the number of variations other than the 100th variation, it is difficult for the player to recognize, for example, the third special suggestion performance, the fourth special suggestion performance, the sixth special suggestion performance, or the seventh special suggestion performance. With respect to the special suggestive effect executed in a mode (a mode in which the deferment is not actively notified by dialogue or a special character), it is made to be executed at a relatively high rate, and the first special suggestive effect and the second special suggestive effect are executed at a relatively high rate. Regarding the special suggestive effect executed in a mode that is relatively easy for the player to recognize, such as the special suggestive effect and the fifth special suggestive effect (a mode in which the game is positively notified that the game is stationary with dialogue or a special character), The 3rd special suggestion effect, the 4th special suggestion effect, the 6th special suggestion effect, and the 7th special suggestion effect may be executed at a lower rate. Or for special suggestion productions that inform that deferment is fixed among special suggestion productions, at a lower rate than the 3rd special suggestion production, the 4th special suggestion production, the 6th special suggestion production, and the 7th special suggestion production may be executed.

(43) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the special display is not displayed when the game state is controlled to a game state different from the normal state, but the game state is controlled to a game state different from the normal state. A special display may be displayed when the

For example, when the game state is controlled to the time saving state, a special display may be displayed on the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 . In the special display at this time, character information corresponding to the number of variations executed after being controlled to a low probability state after turning on the power or after a big hit (characters such as "game 100 times") may be displayed, Character information suggesting the game state currently being controlled (characters of "in chance time", characters of "in play time", etc.) may be displayed. Further, when the game state is controlled to the variable probability state, a special display may be displayed on the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 . The special display at this time may display character information (characters such as "probability changing") suggesting the currently controlled game state.

(43) In the above-described embodiment, when the game state is controlled to the normal state, an example in which the variation pattern can be determined as the variation pattern of "shortened variation lost" was shown, but not limited to such a form , the variation pattern may be determined to be the variation pattern of "shortened variation lost" even when the game state is controlled to any of the game states.

For example, when the game state is controlled to the time saving state B, the rate at which the variation pattern is determined to be "shortening variation off" is that when the game state is controlled to the normal state or the time saving state A, the variation pattern is " Shortening fluctuations may be higher than the percentage determined in "loss". In addition, when the game state is controlled to the time saving state B, the variation pattern with reach among the variation patterns in which the display result is "missing" ("normal reach missing", "super reach A missing", "super reach B If the game state is controlled to the normal state or the time-saving state A, the ratio determined to be a variation pattern with reach among the variation patterns in which the display result is "lost" may be lower than In the following explanation, the variation display in which the display result is "loss" may be described as "loss variation", and the variation display in which the display result is "big win" may be described as "big win variation".

In a relief time-saving game that is controlled after performing a certain number of variable displays from the previous big hit, if a variation pattern in which the variation time is not the shortest among the losing variations ”, etc.) are frequently executed, and furthermore, if the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time (variation pattern with reach, etc.) is frequently executed, the fluctuation efficiency will decrease and the interest in the game will decrease will invite By adopting the configuration of this modification, in the game of the relief time reduction, among the deviation fluctuations, the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time ("shortened fluctuation loss") is frequently executed, and the fluctuation time By lowering the execution ratio of fluctuation patterns with long values (variation patterns involving reach, etc.), the efficiency of fluctuation is improved, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, as a variation pattern for "missing" without reach in the time saving state B, a variation pattern of "ultra-shortening variation missing" whose variation time is shorter than the variation pattern of "shortened variation missing" may be provided, " A variation pattern of "ultra-super-shortened variation-missed" having a shorter variation time than the variation pattern of "super-shortened variation-missed" may be provided.

For example, in the [for time saving state B] [for loss] variation pattern determination table, 1 to 600 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern of "extremely short variation deviation" , and 601 to 990 may be assigned to the variation pattern of "ultra-shortening variation failure", and 991 to 997 may be assigned to the "reach failure" variation pattern.

For example, as a variation pattern for "missing" without reach in time saving state A or time saving state B, "ultra-shortened fluctuation missed" and "shortened fluctuation missed" are provided, while "ultra-super-shortened fluctuation misses ' may not be provided, and 'ultra-shortening variation failure' and 'shortening variation failure' may be provided, and 'ultra-super-shortening variation failure' may also be provided.

For example, in the [for time saving state A] [for loss] variation pattern determination table, 1 to 100 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern of “ultra-shortened variation deviation”. , 101 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "extreme shortening fluctuation deviation", 201 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "shortening fluctuation deviation", and 901 to 997 are assigned to "reach deviation" may be assigned to a variation pattern of Then, in the [for time saving state C] [for loss] variation pattern determination table, 1 to 600 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern of “ultra-shortened variation deviation”. , 601 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "super-ultra-shortening fluctuation deviation", 901 to 950 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "shortening fluctuation deviation", and 951 to 997 are "reach deviation". may be assigned to a variation pattern of

In the example shown above, with respect to the ratio of "ultra-super-shortened variation out of" variation patterns of "non-reach out" to be selected, time saving state B> time saving state C, and time saving state B> time saving state A relationship It has become. Not limited to such a form, with respect to the ratio of selecting "ultra-ultra-shortened fluctuation out" among the fluctuation patterns of "non-reach out", it may be the relationship of time saving state C> time saving state B, time saving state A > It may be a relationship of time saving state B.

In the example shown above, with respect to the rate of selection of the variation pattern of "reach out", time saving state B < time saving state C, and time saving state B < time saving state A relationship is shown, but such Not limited to this form, the ratio of selecting the “reach out” variation pattern may be the relationship of time saving state C < time saving state B, or the relationship of time saving state A < time saving state B. It may be.

Further, for example, as the [loss] variation pattern determination table in the time saving state B, different variation pattern determination tables according to the number of times of variation in the time saving state B may be provided.

For example, after being controlled to the time-saving state B, until the 1st to 300th variation display in which the display result is "off" is executed, in the variation pattern determination table, out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 , 1 to 800 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "ultra-shortened fluctuation deviation", 801 to 950 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach deviation", and 951 to 997 are assigned to "super reach deviation". It may be assigned to a variation pattern. In addition, after being controlled to the time saving state B, until the 301st to 1000th variation display is executed in which the display result is "off", in the variation pattern determination table, out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 , 1 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "super-ultra-shortened fluctuation deviation", 901 to 950 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach deviation", and 951 to 997 are assigned to "super reach deviation". may be assigned to a variation pattern of

(44) In the above embodiment, when the gaming state is the time saving state B, the determination ratio of the variation pattern is made common regardless of the number of variations. However, when the game state is the time saving state B, the determination ratio of the variation pattern may be changed according to the number of times of variation.

For example, among the deviation fluctuations, a fluctuation pattern of "long fluctuation deviation" having a relatively long fluctuation period may be provided. For example, while the fluctuation period of the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach out" is set to 10 seconds, the fluctuation period of the fluctuation pattern of "long fluctuation out" is set to 20 seconds. When the game state is controlled to the time saving state B and the first variation display is performed, the variation pattern of "long variation loss" may be determined at a rate of 100% with respect to the loss variation. Then, when the game state is controlled to the time saving state B and the second and subsequent fluctuation display is performed, the fluctuation pattern of "shortened fluctuation is lost" is determined at a rate of 95% with respect to the loss fluctuation, and "super" at a rate of 5%. It may be determined to be a variation pattern of reach out.

According to such a configuration, it is based on the reserved memory corresponding to the first special symbol before generating the reserved memory corresponding to the second special symbol in the variable display of the relief time reduction (before increasing the number of second reserved memories) It is possible to prevent the variable display from being executed and to prevent the player from being excessively disadvantaged.

(45) In the above embodiment, in the variable display when the display result is "miss", 0.5 seconds is set as the symbol confirmation period based on the reception of the symbol confirmation A designation command at the end of the variation. shall be However, when the display result is "missing", in the variable display that reaches the relief time reduction, 20 seconds may be set as the symbol determination period based on the reception of the symbol determination C designation command at the end of the variation.

For example, in the variable display that reaches the relief time reduction, if a 20-second pattern confirmation period is set, during this symbol confirmation period, an effect to notify that the relief time will be changed or a right hit. may be executed.

(46) In the above embodiment, the period until the game state is controlled to the time saving state B and the first variation display (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed (that is, the number of pending memories is 0) In a certain period), the image display device 5 displays a right-handed promotion image 07TM370 on the upper right portion of the screen at all times, and displays a right-handed promotion image 07TM380 on the center portion of the screen of the image display device 5 . Not limited to such a form, in the period (that is, the period in which the number of pending memories is 0) until the first variable display (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed by being controlled to the time saving state B Alternatively, the right-handed promotion image 07TM370 may be always displayed, and the special right-handed promotion image 07TM380 may not be displayed. Then, the special right-handed promotion image 07TM380 may be displayed corresponding to the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol for the first time. That is, at least the right-handed promotion image 07TM370 should be always displayed at the timing of transition to the relief time reduction.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, after the game state is controlled to the time saving state B, when the first variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the special right-handed promotion image 07TM380 is erased. When the second reserved memory number becomes less than a predetermined number (for example, when it becomes 0) due to the execution of the variable display corresponding to the 2 special symbols, the special right-handed promotion image 07TM380 may be displayed again. .

(47) In the above embodiment, a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed without any operation (handle operation, push button operation, stick controller operation, detection of game ball launch, etc.) being performed on the gaming machine. In this case, the CPU 103 transmits to the effect control CPU 120 a customer-waiting demo display designation command designating that the game is in a customer-waiting state. Then, when the production control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demonstration display designation command, the customer waiting demonstration production in which the demonstration image 07TM500 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. In addition, the customer waiting demo effect shall be terminated when the game machine is operated (handle operation, push button operation, stick controller operation, game ball launch detection, game ball winning detection, etc.). , may not end depending on the passage of time.

The demo image in this case is an image having a higher display priority than the regular hitting to right promotion image and the special hitting to right promotion image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in front). Therefore, it is difficult for the player to always see the right-handed promotion image and the special right-handed promotion image when the demonstration image is displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for a player who simply passes in front of the gaming machine to see that the gaming machine is controlled to the time saving state B.例文帳に追加

(48) In the above embodiment, the variable display is started after subtracting (renewing) 1 from the value of the relief time reduction number counter in step S07TM71 of the special symbol normal processing. Therefore, when the power is turned off during the execution of the variable display, and then the power is turned on and the variable display is resumed (no RAM clear processing is executed), the post-update relief time reduction counter is taken over. there is Here, regarding the variable display that was being executed when the power was turned off, if it was decided to execute a special suggestive effect before the power was turned off, then in the variable display that was resumed after the power was turned on, the special The suggestive effect may be executed (the decision to execute the special suggestive effect before the power was turned off may be taken over after the power is turned on), or the special suggestive effect may not be executed in the variable display resumed after the power is turned on. Good (After turning on the power, the decision to execute the special suggestive effect before turning off the power may be canceled).

(49) In the above embodiment, the character types (character A, character B, and character C) used in the first special suggestive effect are used in the effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit (super ready-to-win effect, etc.). An example of different types of characters (friend character, enemy character) has been described. The types of characters (character A, character B, and character C) used in the first special suggestive effect are not limited to such forms, and the characters used in the effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit (super reach effect, etc.). (friend character, enemy character) may be at least partially common.

(50) In the above embodiment, when a power failure occurs while executing a countdown effect based on the remaining 10 fluctuations until relief time reduction, and then the power is turned on and the fluctuation display is resumed. , the countdown effect may be continuously executed in the variable display after the restarted variable display, or the countdown effect may not be executed (stopped).

Here, for example, if a power failure occurs while the variable display is being executed with the countdown remaining n times, the remaining n times (n variations ) may be resumed, and the countdown effect is not restarted in the first fluctuation display restarted after the power is turned on, and the remaining n-1 times from the next fluctuation display (remaining n-1 fluctuation) ) may be restarted. Also, after the power is turned on, the countdown effect may be restarted from the remaining three times of variation display until the time-saving relief is reached.

(51) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which two or more of the special suggestion effects (first special suggestion effect to eighth special suggestion effect) may be executed in combination. However, execution of the special suggestion effect may be restricted according to a predetermined condition.

For example, one of the special suggestive effects is determined to suggest that the degree of expectation that the RAM clear process has not been executed is low, and the other special suggestive effect is determined to suggest that the RAM clear process has not been executed. If the mode is determined to suggest that the degree is high, one of the special suggestive effects may not be executed (the former effect may be restricted).

Also, for example, in the common variable display, when it is decided to execute one special suggestive effect and the other special suggestive effect, if both special suggestive effects can be executed in duplicate (display area are different, execution timings are different, different effect devices are used, etc.), both of the special suggestion effects may be executed. However, if it is difficult to duplicate both special suggestion effects (when the display area is common, when the execution timing is common, when a common effect device is used, etc.), either special You may restrict execution of suggestion production.

(52) In the above-described embodiment, after the special display change effect is executed once, the special display change effect is not executed thereafter. The special display change effect may be executed again after being executed once.

For example, in the 100th variable display after the power is turned on, after the special display change effect of mode A is executed as the first special display change effect, the special display change effect of mode B or mode C is executed as the second special display change effect. A display change effect may be executed. The execution timing of the second special display change effect may be a predetermined timing in the variable display in which the first special display change effect is executed, or after the variable display in which the first special display change effect is executed. It may be a predetermined timing in the variable display of .

(53) In the above embodiment, the special display change effect is an effect in which a character accompanied by an effect image is displayed near the special display. may be an effect in which the character acts on the special display.

For example, the special display change effect may be a effect in which the character throws a ball accompanied by an effect image against the special display. At this time, the degree of expectation that the RAM clearing process has not been executed may be suggested by the manner of the character throwing the ball or the manner of the effect image of the ball. In addition, in such a special display change effect, there is a production mode in which the character hits the special display after throwing the ball (successful change mode) and a production mode in which the character does not hit the special display after throwing the ball (failed change mode). ) and may be provided. At this time, the mode of the character throwing the ball or the mode of the effect image of the ball may indicate the degree of expectation that the RAM clearing process has not been executed, and the degree of expectation that the change will be successful.

(54) In the above embodiment, if the display result is a variable display that results in a "loss", the first special suggestive effect is performed when neither the special suggestive effect limit flag nor the restoration high base flag is set. Although an executable example has been shown, the display result is not limited to such a form, and it is a variable display in which the display result is "missing", and when neither the special suggestive effect limit flag nor the recovery high base flag is set. Even if there is, the execution of the first special suggestive effect may be restricted when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

For example, if the display result is a variable display that results in "missing", and neither the special suggestion production restriction flag nor the recovery high base flag is set, a high expectation production (super reach production with a high expectation for a big hit, etc. ), the execution of the first special suggestive performance may be restricted in the variable display, and the first special suggestive performance may be executed in the variable display after the variable display.

(55) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which whether or not to execute a special suggestive effect is determined in the process for determining the effect at the start of variation. Whether or not to execute the effect may be determined. That is, by determining the variation pattern, whether or not to execute the special suggestive effect may also be determined.

For example, as a variation pattern in which the display result for the first special symbol is "miss" and the special suggestion effect is not executed, "non-reach loss (no special suggestion effect)" and "normal reach loss (special suggestion A normal table provided with "Super reach A loss (no special suggestion effect)", "Super reach B loss (no special suggestion effect)", and the display result for the first special symbol Fluctuation patterns that are "lost" and for which a special suggestion effect is executed include "non-reach loss (with special suggestion effect)", "normal reach loss (with special suggestion effect)", and "super reach A There is a special table provided with "loss (with special suggestion effect)" and "super reach B failure (with special suggestion effect)", and which table to select according to the value of the relief time reduction counter may decide. With respect to the variable display of the first special symbol in which the special suggestive effect is not executed, one of the variable patterns without the special suggestive effect is determined, and the variable display of the first special symbol in which the special suggestive effect can be executed (turning on the power) As for the 100th variation display after the big hit, or the 100th variation display after the big win), one of the variation patterns with the special suggestive effect is determined. Note that the special table may include variation patterns without special suggestive effects.

(56) In the above embodiment, whether or not to execute the countdown effect or the relief time-saving effect is determined according to the value of the relief time-saving counter. Even if it is a variable display corresponding to any of the symbols, it is possible to execute a countdown effect and a relief time reduction effect.

That is, regardless of whether the variable display in which the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 to 10 is the variation display of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol, countdown production and relief time reduction reach It is possible to execute production.

For example, as a gaming machine in which the upper limit of the number of first reserved memories is 4 and the upper limit of the number of second reserved memories is 4 (the upper limit of the total number of reserved memories is 8), a starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, There is a gaming machine that executes a variable display based on the winning order to the second starting winning port. In such a game machine with variable winning order, in what order are the variable display of the first special symbol for four times and the variable display of the second special symbol for four times based on the eight reserved memories executed? is not constant, the variable display in which the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 to 10, the 100th variable display after turning on the power, or the 100th variable display after the big hit is the variable display of the first special symbol. Or, it is uncertain whether it is a variable display of the second special symbol.

Therefore, for the 100th variation display after the power is turned on and the 100th variation display after the big hit, a special suggestive effect is produced depending on whether it is the first special symbol variation display or the second special symbol variation display. The variation pattern may be determined based on a common special table provided with the associated variation pattern. In addition, a first special table for variable display of the first special pattern and a second special table for variable display of the second special pattern are separately provided so that the variable display of the first special pattern and the second special pattern are displayed. Although different types of variation patterns are determined depending on the variation display, a special suggestion performance may be executed correspondingly (according to the determined variation pattern) for any of the variation displays.

In addition, not only gaming machines with variable winning order, but also gaming machines capable of executing variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol at the same time in parallel, the 100th time after the power is turned on. For the variable display and the 100th variable display after the big hit, the variable display with the first special symbol and the variable display with the second special symbol have a common variation pattern with a special suggestive effect. The variation pattern may be determined based on the special table of . In addition, a first special table for variable display of the first special pattern and a second special table for variable display of the second special pattern are separately provided so that the variable display of the first special pattern and the second special pattern are displayed. Although different types of variation patterns are determined depending on the variation display, a special suggestion performance may be executed correspondingly (according to the determined variation pattern) for any of the variation displays.

(57) In the above embodiment, when the gaming state at the time of power-on is the high-base state, the recovery high-base flag is set to execute the 100th variable display after the power is turned on. Execution of the first special suggestive effect is restricted regardless of whether the current game state is the normal state or the high base state. It should be noted that, in the case of ``when the high base state is controlled in the 100th variation display after power-on'', the display result in any of the 1st to 99th variation display after power-on is determined to be ``loss with time saving''. , and the case where it is controlled to the time saving state C is also included. In the above-described embodiment, in the 100th variation display after the big hit, the first special suggestive effect is displayed regardless of the game state when the power is turned on (regardless of whether the restoration high base flag is set). It is viable.

Further, if the game state at the time of power-on is the normal state, the game state at the time when the variable display is executed for the 100th time after the power is turned on will be the normal state or the high-base flag because the high base flag at recovery is not set. The first special suggestion effect can be executed in any game state of the base state. It should be noted that, in the case of ``when the high base state is controlled in the 100th variation display after power-on'', the display result in any of the 1st to 99th variation display after power-on is determined to be ``loss with time saving''. , and the case where it is controlled to the time saving state C is also included. Therefore, even when the time-saving state C is being controlled, it is possible to execute the first special suggestion effect.

Regardless of the game state when the power is turned on, the game state when the 100th variation display after the power is turned on or the 100th variation display after the big hit is executed is the high base state. In some cases, the execution of the first special suggestion effect may be restricted.

(Means 07-1)
As shown in FIG. 9-10(A), in the 100th variable display after the power is turned on, there are a plurality of presentation modes (A mode, B mode, C mode) as the presentation mode of the first special suggestive presentation, When the first special suggestion performance of A mode is executed, the ratio of the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "700 to 800" is high, and when the first special suggestion performance of B mode is executed. , the ratio of the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "200 to 300" is high, and when the first special suggestive effect of the C mode is executed, the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "0 to 199” is higher. Therefore, according to the value of the relief time saving number counter, the ratio of which effect mode the first special suggestion effect is executed is different.

According to such a configuration, the player can predict the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is reached by the performance mode of the first special suggestion performance, so that the first special suggestion performance is executed. With a sense of anticipation, the game can be played until the variable display (in this example, the 100th variable display after the power is turned on) when the first special suggestion effect is executed. In addition, when it can be predicted that the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the relief time reduction is small by the first special suggestion performance, the game is continued even for the game after the first special suggestion performance is executed for the player. can motivate you to do so.

(Means 07-2)
As shown in FIG. 9-10(A), at the 100th fluctuation display after the power is turned on, if the RAM clear process is not executed, the first special suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 70 to 100%. On the other hand, when the RAM clearing process is executed, the first special suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 60%. Therefore, the execution ratio of the first special suggestion effect is higher when the RAM clear process is not executed than when the RAM clear process is executed.

According to such a configuration, depending on whether or not the first special suggestive effect is executed, the player can predict whether or not the RAM clearing process is executed and the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is reached, so that the first special suggestive effect is executed. With a sense of anticipation for the execution, the game can be played until the variable display (in this example, the 100th variable display after the power is turned on) when the first special suggestion effect is executed. Further, when it is possible to predict that the RAM clearing process has been executed by the first special suggestive effect, the player is motivated to continue the game even after the first special suggestive effect is executed. can give.

(Means 08-1)
As shown in FIG. 9-24, when the production stage changes (changes), an eye-catching production is executed, and as shown in FIGS. When the performance is executed, the second special suggestion performance is executed as a special suggestion performance suggesting that the RAM clear processing is not executed when the game machine is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 9-25, in the 100th fluctuation display after the power is turned on, if the RAM clear process is not executed, the second special suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 70 to 100%. Then, when the RAM clearing process is executed, the second special suggestive effect is executed at a rate of 60%. Therefore, the execution ratio of the second special suggestion effect is higher when the RAM clear process is not executed than when the RAM clear process is executed.

According to such a configuration, the player can predict whether or not the RAM clear processing is executed depending on whether or not the second special suggestive effect is executed, so that the stage is changed at the timing when the second special suggestive effect is executed. You can play with a sense of anticipation. Further, when execution of the RAM clearing process can be predicted by the second special suggestive effect, the player can be motivated to continue the game even after the stage change.

(Means 08-2)
As shown in FIG. 9-25, there are a plurality of production modes (A mode, B mode, C mode) as the performance mode of the second special suggestive effect, and when the second special suggestive effect of A mode is executed , the ratio of the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "700 to 800" is high, and when the second special suggestion effect of the B mode is executed, the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "200 to 300 ” is high, and when the second special suggestive effect of the C mode is executed, the ratio of the value of the relief time reduction number counter is “0 to 199” is high. Therefore, according to the value of the relief time saving number counter, the ratio of which effect mode the second special suggestion effect is executed is different.

According to such a configuration, the player can predict the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is reached by the performance mode of the second special suggestion performance, so that the second special suggestion performance is executed. With anticipation, the game can be played until the stage change, which is the timing at which the second special suggestion performance is executed. In addition, when it can be predicted that the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the rescue time reduction is small by the second special suggestion performance, it is possible to give the player a motivation to continue the game even after the stage change. .

(Means 07-3)
As shown in FIG. 9-9 at the time of fluctuation start effect determination processing, in the first fluctuation display after turning on the power, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 899, the restoration initialization flag is set When the RAM clear process is not executed, that is, when the power is turned off and on without executing the variable display after the RAM clear process is executed (YES in step S07TM1000→YES in step S07TM1010), the RAM clear process is not executed. At this time, a special suggestion effect restriction flag is set (step S07TM1020).

When this special effect restriction flag is set (YES in step S07TM1032), the process of determining whether or not to execute the first special suggestive effect (step S07TM1038) is skipped. Therefore, when the RAM clear processing is being executed at the time of power-on, the power is turned off and turned on (the RAM clear processing is not executed at this time) before the first fluctuation display is executed after the power is turned on. In this case, the execution of the first special suggestion effect can be restricted.

According to such a configuration, in the present embodiment adopting a configuration in which the execution ratio of the first special suggestive effect is high when the RAM clear processing is not performed, the RAM clear processing is performed even if the RAM clear processing is performed. In spite of this, in the 100th fluctuation display after turning on the power, the first special suggestion effect is executed, and the player is prevented from making an erroneous guess that [the RAM clearing process is not executed]. be able to. In addition, it is possible to restrict illegally increasing the execution frequency of the special suggestive performance even though the store has executed the RAM clearing process, thereby preventing the player from being excessively disadvantaged.

(Means 07-4)
As shown in the above embodiment, the execution of the first special suggestion effect may be restricted by skipping the process of determining whether or not the first special suggestion effect is to be executed in the variable display that reaches the relief time saving. . According to such a configuration, in the variable display when the relief time reduction is reached, it is suggested that the RAM clear processing is not executed by executing the first special suggestive effect, and the relief time reduction is reached. It is possible to prevent unnecessarily suppressing the enhancement of the sense of specialness and the sense of expectation, and to prevent the decrease in interest.

(Means 07-5)
As shown in FIG. 9-9, when the display result is "big hit" (YES in step S07TM1034), the process of determining whether or not to execute the first special suggestive effect (step S07TM1038). is skipping. Therefore, it is possible to limit the execution of the first special suggestion effect in the variable display in which the display result is determined to be a "big hit".

According to such a configuration, in the variable display in which the display result is "big win", the execution of the first special suggestion effect suggests that the RAM clearing process has not been executed, resulting in a big win. It is possible to prevent the unnecessary suppression of the special feeling and the improvement of the expectation for the event, and prevent the decrease in interest.

(Means 07-6)
As shown in FIG. 9-17 (B), in the variable display that reaches the relief time reduction, when the first special suggestion effect is executed, at the timing after 2 seconds have passed since the variable display is started (T3 At the timing of ), the first special suggestive effect is executed, and at the timing 6 seconds after the start of the variable display (at the timing of T6, that is, at the special timing), the relief time reduction arrival effect is executed. .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the first special suggestion performance at the timing before the execution of the relief time reduction arrival performance suggesting (notifying) that the relief time reduction has been reached, and the first special suggestion performance It is possible to prevent the interest of the user from decreasing.

(Means 07-7)
As shown in FIG. 9-15 (A), when the fluctuation pattern is a "non-reach out" fluctuation pattern, at the timing of two seconds after the start of the fluctuation display (at the timing of T2), the second 1 A special suggestive effect is being executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (B), when the variation pattern is the variation pattern of "normal reach out", at the timing of 2 seconds after the start of the variation display (at the timing of T2), A first special suggestion effect is being executed. Also, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (C), when the variation pattern is the variation pattern of "super reach A lost", at the timing of 2 seconds after the start of the variation display (at the timing of T2 ), the first special suggestion effect is being executed. Therefore, regardless of the variation pattern, the first special suggestive effect is executed at the timing two seconds after the start of the variation display, which is the common timing.

According to such a configuration, the execution timing of the first special suggestive effect can be shared, the timing during the variable display to which the player should pay attention can be easily recognized, and the effect of the first special suggestive effect can be enhanced. In addition, there is no need to execute the process of determining the execution timing of the first special suggestive effect, and the processing load of the effect control can be reduced.

(Means 07-8)
As shown in FIG. 9-10(A), the first special suggestive effect is executed at a rate of 60% to 100% in the 100th variable display after the power is turned on. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-10(B), in the 100th variation display after the big win, the first special suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 20-30%.

According to such a configuration, when it is difficult to recognize the information about the number of big wins (for example, the history of the number of big wins on the day displayed on the data counter, etc.) ), the player can predict whether or not the RAM clearing process will be executed depending on the execution frequency of the first special suggestive effect, so that the player is not excessively disadvantaged and the interest in the game is prevented from decreasing. be able to.

(Means 07-9)
As shown in the production determination process at the start of fluctuation in FIG. 9-9, when the power is turned on, the game state is a high base state (time saving state A, time saving state B, variable probability state). If set (YES in step S07TM1036), the process of determining whether or not to execute the first special suggestion effect (step S07TM1038) is skipped. Therefore, when the game state is controlled to the high base state when the power is turned on, the execution of the first special suggestive effect can be restricted in the 100th fluctuation display after the power is turned on.

According to such a configuration, if the high base state is controlled to be more advantageous than the normal state when the power is turned on, execution of the RAM clear processing is suggested by executing the first special suggestion effect. If you put it away, you can prevent excessive gambling.

(Means 07-10)
As shown in FIG. 9-21 (B), when the variation pattern is "normal reach lost", at the timing before notifying that the display result is "missed" in the normal reach effect (combination of decorative patterns At the timing of T2 before is stopped and displayed), the first special suggestion effect is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (C), when the variation pattern is a variation pattern with super reach (“super reach A lost”, “super reach B lost”), the display result is “ The first special suggestive effect is executed at the timing after the notification of "lost" (at the timing of T6, which is the timing after the defeat effect is executed in the super reach A effect).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the first special suggestion effect from lowering the interest in the super ready-to-win effect with a high expectation of a big hit, and improve the interest in the game.

(Means 07-11)
As shown in FIGS. 9-11 (2A) to (4A), after the first special suggestion effect of A mode is executed, the special display change effect of A mode is executed, and the lower right portion of the screen of image display device 5 is displayed. special display 07TM150 is changed to special display 07TM150A of A mode.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 (2B) to (4B), after the first special suggestion effect of the B mode is executed, the special display change effect of the B mode is executed, and the screen of the image display device 5 The special display 07TM150 in the lower right part is changed to the B mode special display 07TM150B.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 (2C) to (4C), after the first special suggestive effect of the C mode is executed, the special display change effect of the C mode is executed, and the screen of the image display device 5 The special display 07TM150 in the lower right part has changed to the C mode special display 07TM160C.

According to such a configuration, by changing the display mode of the special display, the suggestion that the RAM clearing process by the first special suggestion effect is not executed is continued even after the first special suggestion effect is finished. It can be done, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Means 07-12)
As shown in FIG. 9-24, when the production stage changes (changes), an eye-catching production is executed, and as shown in FIGS. When the performance is executed, the second special suggestion performance is executed as a special suggestion performance suggesting that the RAM clear processing is not executed when the game machine is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 9-25, there are a plurality of production modes (A mode, B mode, C mode) as the performance mode of the second special suggestive effect, and when the second special suggestive effect of A mode is executed , the ratio of the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "700 to 800" is high, and when the second special suggestion effect of the B mode is executed, the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "200 to 300 ” is high, and when the second special suggestive effect of the C mode is executed, the ratio of the value of the relief time reduction number counter is “0 to 199” is high. Therefore, according to the value of the relief time saving number counter, the ratio of which effect mode the second special suggestion effect is executed is different.

According to such a configuration, the player can predict the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is reached by the performance mode of the second special suggestion performance, so that the second special suggestion performance is executed. With anticipation, the game can be played until the stage change, which is the timing at which the second special suggestion performance is executed. In addition, when it can be predicted that the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the rescue time reduction is small by the second special suggestion performance, it is possible to give the player a motivation to continue the game even after the stage change. .

(Means 07-13)
As shown in FIG. 9-27, the 100th fluctuation display after power-on indicates that the RAM clearing process has not been executed when the game machine is powered on at the timing at which the periodic light-emitting effect should be executed. A third special suggestive effect is executed as a special suggestive effect to be performed.

As shown in FIG. 9-28, there are a plurality of production modes (light emitting color: blue, light emitting color: green, light emitting color: red) as the rendering mode of the third special suggestive rendering, and the third special suggestive rendering [blue]. is executed, the ratio of the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "700 to 800" is high, and when the third special suggestion production [green] is executed, the relief time reduction number counter The ratio of the value is “200 to 300” is high, and when the third special suggestion effect [red] is executed, the ratio of the value of the relief time reduction number counter to “0 to 199” is high. ing. Therefore, according to the value of the relief time saving number counter, the ratio of the third special suggestion effect to be executed in which effect mode is different.

According to such a configuration, the player can predict the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is reached by the performance mode of the third special suggestion performance, so that the third special suggestion performance is executed. With anticipation, the game can be played until the 100th variation after the power is turned on, which is the timing at which the third special suggestion performance is executed. In addition, when it can be predicted that the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the relief time reduction is small by the third special suggestion performance, the game is continued even after the third special suggestion performance is executed for the player. can motivate you to do so. Further, if a configuration is adopted in which the third special suggestive effect can be executed every 100 fluctuations after the power is turned on, it is possible to give further motivation to continue the game until the 100×Nth fluctuation display is performed.

(Means 07-14)
As shown in FIG. 9-29, when the first fluctuation display after power-on is executed, the second special suggestive effect suggesting that the RAM clear process has not been executed when the power to the gaming machine is turned on. 4 A special suggestion production is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-30, there are a plurality of presentation modes (execution period: 10 variations, execution period: 20 variations, execution period: 25 variations) as the presentation modes of the fourth special suggestion presentation. When [10 variation] is executed, the ratio of the value of the relief time saving number counter is "700 to 800" is high, and when the third special suggestion production [20 variation] is executed, The ratio of the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "200 to 300" is high, and when the third special suggestion effect [25 variation] is executed, the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "0 to 199". The percentage of those who are Therefore, according to the value of the relief time saving number counter, the ratio of the fourth special suggestion effect to be executed in which effect mode is different.

According to such a configuration, the player can predict the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the rescue time reduction by the performance mode of the fourth special suggestion performance, so that the fourth special suggestion performance is executed. With a sense of anticipation, the player can play the first game after the power is turned on, which is the timing at which the fourth special suggestion performance is executed. That is, it is possible to promote the operation of a game machine in which the variable display has not been executed even once after the power is turned on.

(Means 07-15)
As shown in FIG. 9-31, when the reach is established, the character D and normal dialogue display (characters of "chance?" When the power is turned on, the RAM clearing process is executed when the power is turned on by displaying the normal dialogue forewarning effect that suggests the degree of expectation of the big hit, and the character D and the special dialogue display (the character "Stationary!?") are displayed. and a fifth special suggestive effect as a special suggestive effect suggesting that it is not performed.

As shown in FIGS. 9-31 (2A) to (2C), character D is displayed in the normal dialog announcement effect, and as shown in FIG. 9-31 (2D), in the fifth special suggestion effect, normal A character D that is common to the speech announcement effect is displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9-31 (2A) to (2C), in the normal dialogue announcement effect, the normal dialogue display including text information suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit among dialogue displays is displayed. As shown in 31 (2D), in the fifth special suggestive effect, a special dialog display including character information suggesting that the RAM clearing process is being executed is displayed among the dialog displays.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the effect control by using a common effect image in the normal dialogue foretelling effect and the fifth special suggestion effect in which the target to be suggested is different.

(Means 07-16)
As shown in FIG. 9-33, in the 100th variation display after the power is turned on, when the combination of decorative symbols that results in a display result of "loss" is stopped and displayed, RAM clear processing is performed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. A sixth special suggestive effect is executed as a special suggestive effect suggesting that is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-34, when the RAM clear process is not executed, the sixth special suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 80%, while when the RAM clear process is executed, The sixth special suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 30%. Therefore, the execution ratio of the sixth special suggestion effect is higher when the RAM clear process is not executed than when the RAM clear process is executed.

According to such a configuration, the player can predict whether or not the RAM clearing process is executed depending on whether or not the sixth special suggestion effect is executed. 6 The game can be played with anticipation for execution of the special suggestion performance. Further, when it can be predicted that the RAM clearing process has been executed by the sixth special suggestive effect, the player is motivated to continue the game even after the sixth special suggestive effect is executed. can give.

(Means 07-17)
As shown in FIG. 9-35, in the 100th variation display after power-on (the display result is "mismatch"), when the gold active change effect is being executed, the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. A seventh special suggestive effect is executed as a special suggestive effect suggesting that the process is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-36, when the gold active change effect is executed, the expectation of big win is higher than when the red active change effect is executed. Further, when the display result is "miss" and the money active change effect is executed, the seventh special suggestion effect is executed.

According to such a configuration, the player can predict whether or not the RAM clearing process is executed depending on whether or not the seventh special suggestive effect is executed. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of disappointment when the display result is "mismatched". Further, when it can be predicted that the RAM clearing process has been executed by the seventh special suggestive effect, the player is motivated to continue the game even after the seventh special suggestive effect is executed. can give.

The characteristic portion 07TM described above includes the following configurations.

The gaming machine of means 07-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that executes variable display (variable display) and is controllable to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player,
A state control means (CPU 103) that can be controlled to a special state (time saving state A, time saving state B (relief time saving state)) in which variable display is more likely to be performed than in a normal state;
Updating means (part for performing step 113IWS71 in game control microcomputer 100) capable of updating numerical information (relief time reduction number counter) when variable display is executed;
Storage means (RAM 102 for storing the value of the relief time reduction number counter) capable of storing the numerical information when the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped;
Initialization means (RAM) capable of initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means when power supply to the game machine is stopped and power supply to the game machine is restarted clear processing) and
With production execution means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production,
In the state control means, the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (900 times) as the number of executions of variable display, so that the special condition (the value of the relief time reduction counter is " 0 ”, that is, when the special state (time saving state B) is established,
The effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) stops the supply of power to the game machine, and stops the supply of power to the game machine without initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means. When restarted (when RAM clear processing is not executed when power is turned on), when the number of executions of variable display after restart reaches a specific number (100 times), the numerical value stored in the storage means It is possible to execute a special suggestive effect (first special suggestive effect) that suggests that the information has not been initialized,
There are a plurality of production modes (A mode, B mode, C mode) as the production mode of the special suggestive production,
Depending on the number of times the variable display is performed after the number of times of execution of the variable display after the restart reaches the specific number of times, the ratio of the performance mode in which the special suggestive effect is executed differs (100 after the power is turned on). The production mode of the first special suggestion production is executed at a different rate according to the value of the relief time reduction number counter in the first variable display)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to predict the number of times of variable display up to the special number of times depending on the effect mode of the special suggestive effect, thereby improving the interest of the special suggestive effect.

The gaming machine of means 07-2 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that executes variable display (variable display) and is controllable to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player,
A state control means (CPU 103) that can be controlled to a special state (time saving state A, time saving state B (relief time saving state)) in which variable display is more likely to be performed than in a normal state;
Updating means (part for performing step 113IWS71 in game control microcomputer 100) capable of updating numerical information (relief time reduction number counter) when variable display is executed;
Storage means (RAM 102 for storing the value of the relief time reduction number counter) capable of storing the numerical information when the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped;
Initialization means (RAM) capable of initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means when power supply to the game machine is stopped and power supply to the game machine is restarted clear processing) and
With production execution means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production,
In the state control means, the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (900 times) as the number of executions of variable display, so that the special condition (the value of the relief time reduction counter is " 0 ”, that is, when the special state (time saving state B) is established,
The effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) stops the power supply to the game machine, and the power supply to the game machine stops without initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means. When restarted (when RAM clear processing is not executed when power is turned on), when the number of executions of variable display after restart reaches a specific number (100 times), the numerical value stored in the storage means It is possible to execute a special suggestive effect (first special suggestive effect) that suggests that the information has not been initialized,
It is possible to execute the special suggestion effect at a different rate according to the number of times of variable display after the number of times of execution of variable display after the restart reaches the specific number (relief time reduction in the 100th variable display after power-on) The execution ratio of the first special suggestion effect differs according to the value of the number counter)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to predict the number of times of variable display until the number of times of special suggestion is reached according to the execution frequency of the special suggestion presentation, thereby improving the interest of the special suggestion presentation.

The gaming machine of means 08-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that executes variable display (variable display) and is controllable to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player,
A state control means (CPU 103) that can be controlled to a special state (time saving state A, time saving state B (relief time saving state)) in which variable display is more likely to be performed than in a normal state;
A storage means (RAM 102 for storing the value of a relief time reduction number counter) capable of storing information about the number of times variable display is performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
Initialization means (RAM clearing process) capable of initializing information stored in the storage means when power supply to the game machine is stopped and power supply to the game machine is restarted )and,
Production execution means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production,
A performance state control capable of controlling any one of a plurality of types of performance states including a first performance state (sunny stage) and a second performance state (cloudy stage) different from the first performance state. Means (production control CPU 120) and
The state control means (CPU 103) has a special condition (the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "0", that is, the relief time reduction is reached) based on the number of execution times of the variable display becoming the special number of times (900 times). is controllable to the special state (time saving state B) when is established,
The effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) stops the power supply to the game machine and restarts the power supply to the game machine without initializing the information stored in the storage means. (when the RAM clearing process is not executed when the power is turned on), a special suggestive effect (second special suggestive effect) suggesting that the information stored in the storage means has not been initialized can be executed. can be,
Depending on whether or not the information stored in the storage means has been initialized, the execution ratio of the special suggestion effect executed when the control is performed from the first effect state to the second effect state differs (RAM Depending on whether or not the clear process is executed, the execution ratio of the second special suggestion effect that is executed when the stage changes from the sunny stage to the cloudy stage will differ.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to promote the game from the first effect state to the second effect state, and it is possible to detect that the information stored in the storage means is not initialized according to the execution frequency of the special suggestive effect. It can be predicted, and the interest of the special suggestive production can be improved.
In addition, the game machine of means 08-1 may include a part of the configuration of the game machine of means 07-1 (for example, a configuration related to updating, storing, and initializing numerical information). 2 (for example, a configuration related to updating, storing, and initializing numerical information) of the game machine.

The gaming machine of means 08-2 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that executes variable display (variable display) and is controllable to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player,
A state control means (CPU 103) that can be controlled to a special state (time saving state A, time saving state B (relief time saving state)) in which variable display is more likely to be performed than in a normal state;
A storage means (RAM 102 for storing the value of a relief time reduction number counter) capable of storing information about the number of times variable display is performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
Initialization means (RAM clearing process) capable of initializing information stored in the storage means when power supply to the game machine is stopped and power supply to the game machine is restarted )and,
Production execution means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production,
A performance state control capable of controlling any one of a plurality of types of performance states including a first performance state (sunny stage) and a second performance state (cloudy stage) different from the first performance state. Means (production control CPU 120) and
The state control means (CPU 103) has a special condition (the value of the relief time reduction number counter is "0", that is, the relief time reduction is reached) based on the number of execution times of the variable display becoming the special number of times (900 times). is controllable to the special state (time saving state B) when is established,
The effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) stops the power supply to the game machine and restarts the power supply to the game machine without initializing the information stored in the storage means. (when the RAM clearing process is not executed when the power is turned on), a special suggestive effect (second special suggestive effect) suggesting that the information stored in the storage means has not been initialized can be executed. can be,
There are a plurality of production modes (A mode, B mode, C mode) as the production mode of the special suggestive production,
Depending on whether or not the information stored in the storage means is initialized, the special suggestive effect executed when the first effect state is controlled to the second effect state is executed in which effect mode. (Depending on whether or not the RAM clearing process is executed, the second special suggestive effect that is executed when the stage changes from the sunny stage to the cloudy stage is selected at a different rate. a)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, the game can be promoted from the first effect state to the second effect state, and whether or not the information stored in the storage means has been initialized according to the effect mode of the special suggestive effect. can be predicted, and the amusement of the special suggestive production can be improved.
In addition, the game machine of means 08-1 may include a part of the configuration of the game machine of means 07-1 (for example, a configuration related to updating, storing, and initializing numerical information). 2 (for example, a configuration related to updating, storing, and initializing numerical information) of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine of means 07-3 is
A game machine of means 07-1, means 07-2, means 08-1, and means 08-2,
After the numerical information stored in the storage means is initialized by the initialization means, the power supply to the game machine is stopped without executing the variable display, and then the power to the game machine is stopped. When the supply is restarted and the number of executions of the variable display after the restart reaches the specified number of times, the execution of the special suggestion effect can be restricted (as shown in the effect determination process at the time of fluctuation start, the power supply In the first variable display after turning on, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 899, that is, when the power is turned off and on without executing the variable display even once after the RAM clear processing is executed , the process for determining whether or not to execute the first special suggestive effect is skipped by setting the special suggestive effect restriction flag)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to restrict the illegal execution of the special suggestive performance even though the numerical information stored in the storage means has been initialized, thereby preventing the player from being excessively disadvantaged. can be done.

The gaming machine of means 07-4 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 07-1 to 07-3, means 08-1 and means 08-2,
When power supply to the game machine is stopped and power supply to the game machine is restarted without initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means, variable display after restart When the number of times of execution reaches a specific number and the special condition is satisfied in the variable display, the execution of the special suggestive effect can be restricted (when the variable display is executed for the 100th time after the power is turned on, the relief time reduction is reached. If you do, do not execute the first special suggestion production)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when the special condition is established, it is possible to prevent the numerical information stored in the storage means from being suggested as not being initialized, thereby preventing the interest from being lowered.

The gaming machine of means 07-5 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 07-1 to 07-4, means 08-1 and means 08-2,
When power supply to the game machine is stopped and power supply to the game machine is restarted without initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means, variable display after restart When the number of times of execution reaches a specific number and the advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display, the execution of the special suggestion effect can be restricted (when the 100th variable display is executed after the power is turned on, the display If the result is a "jackpot", the first special suggestion effect is not executed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent suggesting that the numerical information stored in the storage means has not been initialized when the control is performed in an advantageous state, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

The gaming machine of means 07-6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 07-1 to 07-5, means 08-1 and means 08-2,
The production execution means (production control CPU 120) is
In the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied, a notification effect for notifying that the special condition is satisfied can be executed at the first timing (relief at the timing (special timing) 6 seconds after the start of the variable display) We are running a short-time arrival production),
When power supply to the game machine is stopped and power supply to the game machine is restarted without initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means, variable display after restart When the number of times of execution reaches a specific number and the special condition is satisfied in the variable display, the special suggestive effect can be executed at a second timing before the first timing (two seconds after the start of the variable display). The first special suggestion production is executed at the elapsed timing)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest that the numerical information stored in the storage means has not been initialized before notifying that the special condition has been established, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the special suggestive presentation from deteriorating. .

The gaming machine of means 07-7 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 07-1 to 07-6, means 08-1 and means 08-2,
Includes a first variable display pattern ("non-reach out" variation pattern) and a second variable display pattern ("super reach out of A" variation pattern) having a longer variable display period than the first variable display pattern A variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns (the part that performs step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100),
The effect executing means can execute the special suggestion effect at a common timing when the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern and when the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern. (Even if it is a variation pattern of "non-reach loss" or a variation pattern of "super reach A loss", the first special suggestion effect will be performed at the timing of 2 seconds after the start of the variable display. Running)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, regardless of the variable display pattern, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the timing at which the player should pay attention, and the effect of the special suggestive effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 07-8 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 07-1 to 07-7, means 08-1 and means 08-2,
After the power supply to the game machine is stopped and the power supply to the game machine is restarted without initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means, the advantageous state is obtained. In the case (when the RAM clearing process is not executed when the power is turned on and the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state), after the end of the advantageous state, the execution ratio of the special suggestive effect is set higher than before the control to the advantageous state. (The 100th variation after the big hit has a lower execution ratio of the first special suggestive effect than the 100th variation after the power is turned on.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it becomes easy to guess that the numerical information stored in the storage means has not been initialized from the execution frequency of the special suggestive effect, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

The gaming machine of means 07-9 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 07-1 to 07-8, means 08-1 and means 08-2,
The state control means, as the special state, a first special state (time saving state (low probability / high base state)) and a second special state (probability variable state) that is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first special state (high accuracy/high base state)) and can be controlled,
The updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display is executed, depending on whether the control is in the normal state or the first special state. When the state is controlled, the numerical information is not updated when the variable display is executed (the game control microcomputer 100 updates the relief time reduction number counter when the probability variation flag is not set) , do not update the relief time reduction counter when the probability variable flag is set),
The effect executing means stops the power supply to the gaming machine and restarts the power supply to the gaming machine without initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means. When the normal state is controlled, the special suggestion effect can be executed when the number of executions of the variable display after restarting reaches the specified number of times. When controlled, the first special suggestion effect can be executed when the number of executions of the variable display reaches 100 times),
After the power supply to the game machine is stopped and the power supply to the game machine is restarted without initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means, the control is performed to the first special state. In this case, it is possible to limit the execution of the special suggestive effect when the number of executions of the variable display after restarting reaches the specific number of times (when the power is turned on, the RAM clear processing is not executed and the time saving state is controlled. In this case, when the number of executions of the variable display reaches 100 times, the first special suggestive effect is not executed based on the fact that the restoration high base flag is set.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from being excessively enhanced by executing the special suggestion effect when the special state is controlled.

The gaming machine of means 07-10 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 07-1 to 07-9, means 08-1 and means 08-2,
The production execution means (production control CPU 120) is
A first specific suggestive effect (normal reach effect) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state, and a second specific suggestive effect (super reach A effect) in which the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the first specific suggestive effect. ) and is executable to
The special suggestion effect can be executed at any one of a plurality of timings,
When the first specific suggesting effect is executed, the special suggesting effect can be executed at the first timing before the effect result of the first specific suggesting effect is notified (if the variation pattern is "normal reach out", At a certain time, when the normal reach effect is executed, the first special suggestive effect is executed before being notified that the display result is "lost" in the normal reach effect),
When the second specific suggestive effect is executed, the special suggestive effect can be executed at a second timing after the effect result of the second specific suggestive effect is notified (the fluctuation pattern is "super reach A is off , the first special suggestive effect is executed after being notified that the display result is "lost" in the super reach A effect.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special suggestive effect from lowering interest in the second specific suggestive effect, which has a high rate of being controlled to an advantageous state, and improve the amusement of the game.

The game machine of means 07-11 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 07-1 to 07-10, means 08-1, and means 08-2,
A display means (image display device 5) is provided,
The production execution means (production control CPU 120) is
It is possible to display on the display means special information corresponding to the number of variable displays executed after the power supply to the game machine is restarted (special display is displayed at the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5). shown),
When the special suggestive effect is executed, it is possible to change the form of the special information (the form of the special display is changed by executing the special display change effect after the first special suggestive effect is executed). changing)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, by changing the mode of the special information, it is possible to continuously recognize the suggestion that the numerical information stored in the storage means has not been initialized, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game. can.

The gaming machine of means 07-12 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 07-1 to 07-11, means 08-1, and means 08-2,
A production state control means (production control CPU 120) capable of controlling a plurality of types of production states including a first production state (sunny stage) and a second production state (cloudy stage) different from the first production state. prepared,
The effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) can execute the special suggestion effect (when the stage is changed from the sunny stage to the cloudy stage) when the first effect state is controlled to the second effect state. In addition, the second special suggestive production is executed along with the eye-catching production),
There are a plurality of production modes (A mode, B mode, C mode) as the production mode of the special suggestive production,
Depending on whether or not the numerical information stored in the storage means is initialized when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after the power supply to the game machine is stopped, The ratio of the effect mode in which the special suggestive effect is executed is different (the effect mode of the second special suggestive effect is selected at a different rate depending on whether or not the RAM clearing process is executed).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to promote the game from the first effect state to the second effect state, and whether or not the numerical information stored in the storage means has been initialized by the effect mode of the special suggestive effect. can be predicted, and the amusement of the special suggestive production can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 07-13 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 07-1 to 07-12, means 08-1, and means 08-2,
The effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) performs any one of a plurality of effect modes including a specific mode when the number of executions of the variable display after the restart reaches the specific number of times (100 times). (the third special suggestion effect can be executed in 100 fluctuation displays after the power is turned on),
Depending on whether or not the numerical information stored in the storage means is initialized when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after the power supply to the game machine is stopped, The rate at which the special suggestive effect of the specific mode is executed is different (the effect mode of the third special suggestive effect is selected at a different rate depending on whether or not the RAM clear process is executed).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, the game can be promoted until the number of execution times of the variable display reaches a specific number, and whether or not the numerical information stored in the storage means has been initialized according to the execution frequency of the special suggestive effect of the specific mode. can be predicted, and the amusement of the special suggestive production can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 07-14 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 07-1 to 07-13, means 08-1, and means 08-2,
The effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) can execute the special suggestive effect (after power-on) in a predetermined period including the first variable display after power supply to the gaming machine is started. The fourth special suggestive effect is executed from the first variable display to multiple variable displays),
There are a plurality of performance modes (execution period: 10 variations, 20 variations, 25 variations) as the performance modes of the special suggestion performance,
Depending on whether or not the numerical information stored in the storage means is initialized when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after the power supply to the game machine is stopped, The ratio of which effect mode the special suggestive effect is executed is different (the effect mode of the fourth special suggestive effect is selected at a different rate depending on whether or not the RAM clearing process is executed).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to promote a game to a game machine in which the first variable display is not executed after the power supply to the game machine is started, and to store in the storage means according to the effect mode of the special suggestive effect. It is possible to predict whether or not the entered numerical information has been initialized, and the interest in the special suggestive presentation can be improved.

The game machine of means 07-15 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 07-1 to 07-14, means 08-1 and means 08-2,
The production execution means (production control CPU 120) is
The effect suggesting that the control is in the advantageous state, and includes a first effect element (character D) and a second effect element (normal dialogue display among dialogue displays) different from the first effect element. It is possible to execute a specific effect (normal dialogue announcement effect),
When power supply to the gaming machine is resumed without initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means after the power supply to the gaming machine has been stopped (RAM clearing process executed) the special suggestive effect (fifth special suggestive effect (special dialogue It is executable as a notice production)),
The first effect element in the specific effect and the first effect element in the special suggestive effect are common aspects,
The second effect element in the specific effect and the second effect element in the special suggestive effect are in different aspects (the character D is common to the normal dialogue preview effect and the fifth special suggestive effect, but the normal In the dialog announcement effect, the normal dialog display is displayed, and in the 5th special suggestive effect, the special dialog display is displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, the first effect element is made common between the specific effect and the special suggestive effect, and the second effect element is made different, thereby reducing the processing load of effect control and improving the amusement of the game. can.

The game machine of means 07-16 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 07-1 to 07-15, means 08-1 and means 08-2,
Equipped with variable display means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display of identification information (variable display of decorative patterns),
When the variable display of the identification information results in a specific display result (jackpot symbol combination "777", etc.), the advantageous state (jackpot game state) can be controlled;
As a display result different from the specific display result, a first display result (such as "212" which does not include "7" in the middle symbol as a missing symbol combination) and a second display result different from the first display result ( There are "272" etc. including "7" in the middle symbol as a combination of symbols that are out,
The effect executing means is capable of executing the effect of displaying the second display result as the special suggesting effect (stopping display of "7" in the middle symbol indicates that the RAM clearing process is not being executed. It is executed as the 6th special suggestion production),
Depending on whether or not the numerical information stored in the storage means is initialized when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after the power supply to the game machine is stopped, The execution ratio of the effect for displaying the second display result is different (the execution ratio of the sixth special suggestion effect is different depending on whether or not the RAM clearing process is executed).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, by drawing attention to the display result, it is possible to reduce the feeling of disappointment when the control is not in an advantageous state.

The game machine of means 07-17 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 07-1 to 07-16, means 08-1 and means 08-2,
The production execution means (production control CPU 120) is
A first specific suggestion effect (red active change effect) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state, and a second specific suggestion effect (gold active change production), and can be executed,
After the power supply to the game machine is stopped, the power supply to the game machine is restarted without initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means (RAM clear processing is executed. and when the advantageous state is not obtained after the execution of the second specific suggestive effect, suggesting that the numerical information stored in the storage means has not been initialized. is possible (when the display result is "missing" after the gold active change effect is executed, the gold active change effect is executed as the seventh special suggestion effect)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the feeling of disappointment when control is not performed in an advantageous state after the execution of the second specific suggestion effect.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that executes variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
state control means capable of controlling a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state;
updating means capable of updating the numerical information when the variable display is performed;
storage means capable of storing the numerical information when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
initialization means capable of initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and power supply to the gaming machine is restarted;
and a production execution means capable of executing production,
The state control means is capable of controlling to the special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of execution times of the variable display. ,
When the power supply to the game machine is stopped and the power supply to the game machine is restarted without initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means, when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a specific number of times, a special suggestive effect suggesting that the numerical information stored in the storage means has not been initialized can be executed;
When the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state in which the number of executions of the variable display is the specific number of times, the special suggestive effect is restricted,
When the number of executions of the variable display is not controlled to the advantageous state in the variable display that is the specific number of times, and when a specific condition is satisfied, the special suggestive effect is restricted ,
Information about the number of times the variable display has been executed since power supply to the gaming machine was started can be displayed as a special display,
The special display can change in different modes based on the execution of the special suggestive effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images